JP2023107880A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When winning/losing determination results in winning, an entry effective period occurs, and entry to a distribution through winning part occurs and hence a distribution execution mode occurs. A distribution winning device is opened in a distribution execution mode, and an opening/closing execution mode occurs when V winning is generated by game balls entering the distribution winning device. In this case, distribution determination processing is executed when entry to the distribution through winning part occurs. However, the distribution execution mode occurs regardless of a result of the distribution determination processing. A first distribution execution mode and a second distribution execution mode exist as a distribution execution mode, a degree of expectation toward occurrence of V winning in the first distribution execution mode is higher than that in the second distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, variation display of a pattern is performed, and a stop result corresponding to the presence or absence of occurrence of V winning is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns, etc. is finally displayed on the display surface, and a predetermined game state is entered. Then, when the game moves to a predetermined game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player based on the occurrence of a privilege giving opportunity due to the player's game operation during a specific period;
a predetermined operation control means for controlling the predetermined operation means so that a predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period;
with
The predetermined action control means is characterized by comprising mode determining means for changing the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) A vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the non-guiding state, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion in the guiding state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (A) A time chart showing an operation mode of the distribution winning device in the first distribution execution mode, and (B) a time chart showing an operation mode of the distribution winning device in the second distribution execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine and the display content on the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the game time, the prize-winning effective period of the through prize-winning part for distribution, and distribution execution mode. (A) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an opening/closing execution mode generated from a first distribution execution mode; (B) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an opening/closing execution mode generated from a second distribution execution mode; It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the sound and light MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing in the sound and light side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU; It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution standby|waiting in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing distribution start processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of distribution in main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special electric start processing in the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how a game progresses. (A) and (B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the distribution winning device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for distribution standby performed by main side MPU in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the main-side ROM in the fourth embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for each winning result. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a table group; It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution standby|waiting in main side MPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an allocation table; It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing in main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the gaming state in which the winning/failure determination process and the allocation determination process are executed using the second high probability table group; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device corresponding to the game state in which the winning/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group or the fifth high probability table group; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the success/failure determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, and (b) the distribution determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the distribution determination. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision performed by main side MPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing second game state transition processing in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transition processing performed by main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing second game state transition processing in the main side MPU. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of winning results in the eighth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the processing for distribution in main side MPU.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 16 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 23 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 22 of the resin base 21 .

The configuration of the game board 23 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 23 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 22 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 75a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or shooting handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is shot.

The game board 23 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general prize winning section 31, a first operating section 32, a second operating section 33, a special through prize winning section 34, a distribution through prize winning section 35, a distribution prize winning device 36, a special electric prize winning device 37, variable A display unit 41, a special figure unit 42, a general figure unit 43, and the like are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the special through winning portion 34 and the sorting through winning portion 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any one of the general winning section 31, the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electric winning device 37, the number of game media available to the player is A predetermined number of game balls are put out in order to increase the . Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning portion 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the first operating portion 32, When three game balls are put out and a ball enters the second operating section 33, one game ball is put out and a ball enters the distribution winning device 36. 15 game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 37, the same 15 game balls as when a ball enters the distributed prize winning device 36 are paid out. is executed.

As will be described later, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a discharge passage area 65b and a V winning passage region 65c. Although it will pass through either of the areas 65c, the same number (specifically 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of whether the game balls pass through either the discharge passage area 65b or the V winning passage area 65c. be done. Also, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls of the first operation unit 32 and the number of the second operation units 33 may be the same, and the number of prize balls of the distribution winning device 36 is the number of special electric prizes. The number of prize balls of the device 37 may be greater than or less than the number of prize balls.

In addition, an out port 23a is provided at the bottom of the game board 23, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 23a. Further, the game board 23 is provided with a large number of nails 23b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of the game ball into the out port 23a, the general winning portion 31, the first operating portion 32, the second operating portion 33, the special figure through winning portion 34, The entry of a game ball into the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution prize winning device 36, and the special electric prize winning device 37 is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 41 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 41 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23, an area where the game balls shot to the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, an upper area PA1, which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 41 in the game area PA, and a lower area continuous with the upper area PA1 and higher than the variable display unit 41. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PA1 and to the right of the variable display unit 41, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 41 continuously below it.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the amount of rotation in the first range which is less than the reference amount of rotation as the first shooting operation, the game ball is ejected to the left of the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper area PA1. flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→left area PA2→lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the upper area PA1 is positioned to the right of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PA2 of the left side area PA2 and the right side area PA3. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4.

The 1st operation|movement part 32 is installed in lower side area|region PA4. The first operating portion 32 is open upward, and a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing entry of a game ball into the first operating portion 32 is not provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating section 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating portion 32 is always capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operating portion 32 . In addition, the first operating portion 32 is arranged directly below the stage 41a formed in the variable display unit 41, and the game ball flowed onto the stage 41a through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 41. A game ball ejected from the center of the stage 41 a to the outside of the variable display unit 41 easily enters the first operating section 32 . A detection sensor 32a is provided in the first operating portion 32, and a game ball that has won the first operating portion 32 is detected by the detection sensor 32a.

Here, as described above, the first operating portion 32 is provided in the lower area PA4, but the game flowed down the right side area PA3 on the upstream side toward the right side area PA3 with respect to the first operating portion 32 A control nail 23c is provided to prevent the ball from reaching the first operating portion 32. As shown in FIG. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided for the left side area PA2 and is not provided for the right side area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to win the first operation unit 32, but the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so as to do so, winning to the first operating section 32 is disabled. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flows down the right area PA3 by not providing the control nail 23c or by providing the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a to the right area PA3. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to win a prize to the first operation unit 32 even when the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to do so.

The second operating portion 33 is installed in the right side area PA3. That is, the second operation unit 33 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the second operating portion 33 will be described with reference to FIG. 4(a). FIG. 4(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the non-receiving state. The second operating portion 33 includes a base unit 51 formed with a discharge passage 53 for discharging game balls flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 23, and a discharge passage 53 for discharging game balls flowing down the game area PA. and a guiding unit 52 for guiding to. An entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A detection sensor 54 is provided on the exit portion 53 b side of the discharge passage 53 , and the game ball that has entered the second operating portion 33 is detected by the detection sensor 54 .

Guidance unit 52 receives from below the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, guide member 55 for guiding the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, into the discharge passage 53 A situation in which the guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the guidance of the game ball is disabled and the guidance position where the guidance is possible, and the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position is arranged in a blocking position for blocking the inflow of game balls into the discharge passage 53, and is arranged in a non-blocking position where the inflow of game balls into the discharge passage 53 is not blocked in a situation where the guide member 55 is arranged in the guiding position. A blocking member 57 is provided. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 faces downward. A transmission unit 58 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving portion 56 to the guide member 55 and blocking member 57 .

When the guide driving portion 56 is in a non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front area of the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is not guided into the second discharge passage 53. The ball flows downward in the play area PA without entering the operating portion 33. - 特許庁Further, since the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 is less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 33 under the condition that the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position.

When the guide driving portion 56 is driven, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means, so that the guide member 55 is placed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is released. placed in the blocking position. FIG. 4(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the guided state.

When the guide member 55 is arranged at the guiding position, the tip side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive from below the game ball that flows down the area in front of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA. Since the upper surface of the tip end of the guide member 55 slopes downward toward the inlet 53a of the discharge passage 53, the game ball received from below at the tip end of the guide member 55 moves toward the upper surface of the guide member 55. , and is guided into the discharge passage 53 . Further, when the blocking member 57 is arranged at the non-blocking position, the tip of the blocking member 57 is displaced so as to be positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The ball flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57 . As a result, the guide driving portion 56 is driven, and the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance portion 53 a in the game area PA enters the second operating portion 33 . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide driving portion 56 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position will be referred to as the non-guiding state (or the second operation) of the guide unit 52 . The closed state of the second operating portion 33, the non-receiving state of the second operating portion 33, and the non-guiding state of the second operating portion 33). is located at the non-blocking position is referred to as the guiding state of the guiding unit 52 (or the open state of the second operating portion 33, the receiving state of the second operating portion 33, or the guiding state of the second operating portion 33).

The second operating portion 33 has a cover member 59 that faces the entrance portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The cover member 59 is formed in the shape of a gate so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the area in front of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA. It is provided so as to limit the number of game balls to one and to regulate the forward movement and lateral movement of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, when the guide unit 52 of the second operating portion 33 is in the guided state, a plurality of game balls are prevented from being guided into the discharge passage 53 of the second operating portion 33 at the same time. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the entrance portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guided state.

As shown in FIG. 3, above the second operating portion 33 in the right area PA3, a special through winning portion 34 and a sorting through winning portion 35 are vertically arranged side by side. In other words, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the special figure through winning part 34 and the distribution through winning part 35 cannot win a prize, and the right area PA3 Winning is possible when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down. The special figure thru winning part 34 and the distribution thru winning part 35 have through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A sorting thru winning section 35 is provided at the lower position. The distance between the special figure through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion 35 is about one game ball, and the through hole of the special figure through winning portion 34 and the distribution through winning portion No obstacle member such as a nail 23b is provided between the portion 35 and the through hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special through winning portion 34 in the vertical direction surely passes through the sorting through winning portion 35. - 特許庁In addition, a second operating portion 33 is provided at a position vertically below the distribution through winning portion 35, and further downstream of the second operating portion 33 in the right area PA3, a special electric winning device 37 and a shaking A minute winning device 36 is provided. Therefore, it is possible for the game ball that has won the special figure through winning section 34 or the distribution through winning section 35 to win the second operation section 33, the special electric winning device 37, or the distribution winning device 36. .

The right side area PA3, in which the second operating portion 33, the special figure through winning portion 34, and the distribution through winning portion 35 are collectively arranged, has a variable display unit 41 on the left side, which is in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 23. The right side is defined by a regulation wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 23 . The right side area PA3 is set to have a lateral dimension narrower than that of the lower side area PA4, and the lateral dimension is such that it is impossible to arrange the game ball entry devices in the lateral direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game to the second operation unit 33, the special figure through winning unit 34, and the distribution through winning unit 35 It is easier for the ball to enter the ball.

The arrangement mode of a plurality of nails 23b on the upstream side of the special figure through winning portion 34 in the right side area PA3 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 to the special figure through winning portion 34. . As a result, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is easy to enter the special figure through winning portion 34, and the second operating portion 33 and It is easy for the ball to enter the through winning section 35 for sorting.

A detection sensor 34a is provided in the special figure through winning section 34, and the game ball that has won the special figure through winning section 34 is detected by the detection sensor 34a. Further, a detection sensor 35a is provided in the distribution through winning section 35, and the game ball that has won the distribution through winning section 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35a.

The guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 is switched from the non-guiding state to the guiding state based on the winning to the special figure thru winning section 34 . Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the special figure through winning part 34 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 43 provided in the lower left corner, which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA Variation display of the pattern is performed in the figure display section 43a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is winning of the induction execution state, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 43a is finished, the transition is made to the induction execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

The general pattern display unit 43a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the pattern display device 44 to be described later in the normal map display unit 43a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the normal map display unit 43a. Become. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the pattern displayed in the normal figure display unit 43a includes a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed.

In the normal map unit 43, a normal map holding display portion 43b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal map display portion 43a. The number of game balls won by the special figure through prize winning section 34 is reserved up to four at maximum, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display section 43b.

Incidentally, the display range of the normal pattern display section 43a is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44, which will be described later. Furthermore, the display range of both the normal pattern display portion 43a and the normal pattern reservation display portion 43b is also narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44. FIG. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the pattern display device 44 rather than the normal pattern display unit 43a and the normal pattern reservation display unit 43b.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of the winning of the first operating portion 32 or the second operating portion 33 . When the winning lottery is carried out, the special figure unit 42 performs the variable display of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

In detail about the special figure unit 42, the special figure display part 42a is provided in the special figure unit 42. As shown in FIG. In the special figure display section 42a, a variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery based on the occurrence of the winning of the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33. - 特許庁Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The period from when the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a to when the variable display of the pattern is finished after displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game cycle.

The special figure display section 42a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 44 described later in the special figure display unit 42a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a. Become. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 42a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 42, a special figure reservation display section 42b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 42a. The number of game balls won in the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the special figure reservation display part 42b. The display range of the special figure display section 42a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44, which will be described later. In addition, the entire display range of the special figure display portion 42a and the special figure reservation display portion 42b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 44 rather than the special figure display unit 42a and the special figure reservation display unit 42b.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display part 42a, the display effect is performed in accordance with it in the pattern display device 44 provided in the variable display unit 41. - 特許庁The pattern display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The display contents of the pattern display device 44 will be described later in detail. The pattern display device 44 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

When a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 results in a winning result, and the game cycle corresponding to the winning result ends, the winning to the distribution through winning part 35 is valid. Become. Then, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning unit 35 during the prize valid period, the game shifts to a distribution execution mode in which a prize in the distribution prize winning device 36 becomes possible. If a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period and a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, the prize in the distribution through prize winning section 35 is invalidated again.

As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided at a position lower than the second operating portion 33 in the right side area PA3. That is, the distribution winning device 36 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 in addition to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 36. As shown in FIG.

The distribution winning device 36, as shown in FIG. A distribution side opening/closing member 62 is provided for switching to an open state through which balls can pass. The distribution side opening/closing member 62 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 63 for the distribution entrance.

A game ball that has entered the sorting entrance 61 is guided to a branch passage 65 formed in a base body 64 of the sorting prize winning device 36, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 65 includes an upstream passage region 65a which is set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 65 to a midway position of the branch passage 65, and the upstream passage region 65a. and a discharge passage area 65b set so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and a side different from the discharge passage area 65b provided by branching from the middle position of the discharge passage area 65b. A V winning passage area 65c for guiding the ball is provided. In this case, the dimension of the upstream passage area 65a in the direction perpendicular to the passage direction is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, so that the direction perpendicular to the passage direction A game ball is prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 65a in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up. Therefore, it is prevented that a plurality of game balls simultaneously reach the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b.

A switching piece 66 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 65b to the V winning path area 65c is provided at the branch point of the discharge path area 65b to the V winning path area 65c. The switching piece 66 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 65c with respect to the discharge passage region 65b in the base body 64, and is entirely retracted outside the discharge passage region 65b. and a V-guide position projecting into the discharge passage area 65b. The driving force of the switching driving portion 67 is transmitted to the switching piece 66 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching driving portion 67 is in the non-driving state, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and when the switching driving portion 67 is in the driving state, the switching piece 66 is retracted. The switching piece 66 is displaced against the urging force and arranged at the V-guiding position.

When the switching piece 66 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 flows down the discharge passage region 65b without being guided to the V prize passage region 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by a count detection sensor 68 provided downstream of the branch position of the switching piece 66 in the discharge passage area 65b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 65 is received by the switching piece 66 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 66 in the state of being arranged at the V guide position slopes downward toward the V winning path area 65c. As a result, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 66 flows into the V winning path area 65c due to its own weight, and flows down the V winning path area 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged behind the game board 23 after being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the V winning path area 65c.

When the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 68 or when the game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the sorting prize winning device 36 are paid out. be done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur.

During the period of the distribution execution mode, the distribution display section 42c provided in the special figure unit 42 performs a variable display of the pattern. In detail about the period during which the variable display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display section 42c, the winning valid period during which the winning result is displayed in the special figure display section 42a and the winning to the distribution through winning section 35 becomes effective When it is started, the variable display of the pattern is started in the distribution display section 42c. Then, when the sorting execution mode ends, the variable display of the pattern ends. In this case, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the sorting execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the sorting display section 42c ends in a state in which the stop result at the time of the V winning is displayed. When the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball in the sorting execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the sorting display section 42c ends in a state in which the stop result at the time of non-V winning is displayed. be done. When the stop result at V winning is displayed, the opening and closing execution mode is generated after that, and when the stop result at non-V winning is displayed, the opening and closing execution is triggered by the execution of this distribution execution mode. Mode transitions do not occur.

The distribution display section 42c is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display such as that of the pattern display device 44 in the sorting display section 42c, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the sorting display section 42c. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The patterns displayed in the sorting display unit 42c include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed.

The display range of the distribution display section 42c is narrower than the display surface of the pattern display device 44. As shown in FIG. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the pattern display device 44 rather than to the distribution display section 42c.

In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize for the special electric prize winning device 37 . As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 33 and above the sorting prize winning device 36 in the right area PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 37 cannot win a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the shooting operation device 37 makes the game ball flow down the right side area PA3. 28 is operated, winning is possible.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 is provided with a large prize winning opening 37a having a size through which a game ball can pass. It has a special electric side opening/closing member 37b that switches between an open state and an open state through which the electric vehicle can pass. The special electric side opening/closing member 37b is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the special electric drive unit 37c. The special electric prize winning device 37 has a game ball passage with a large prize winning port 37a serving as an entrance portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the game ball passage through the special electric prize winning port 37a is detected by a special electric prize winning detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 37d, it is ejected behind the game board 23. FIG.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 23 having the above structure is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 71 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 71 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 72 is fitted therein. The window panel 72 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 73 is provided above the window portion 71 . A pair of left and right speaker units 74 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 75 and a lower bulging portion 76 that bulge forward are arranged vertically below the window portion 71 . An upper plate 75a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 75, and a lower plate 76a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 76. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 75a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 76a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 75a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 23), a main control device 81 that controls the main game is mounted. The main controller 81 has a main control board housed in a board box. In addition, the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are combined inseparably, and the structure of the joint that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 82 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 83 and a controller assembly unit 84 are attached to the back pack 82 .

The payout mechanism part 83 includes a tank 85 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 86 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 85 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 86 are discharged to the upper tray 75a or the lower tray 76a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 86. The payout mechanism 83 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 84 includes a payout control device 87 having a function of controlling a payout device 86, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 88 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 87 and the power supply/launch control device 88 are arranged so that the payout control device 87 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 so as to be superimposed on each other.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 81 has a main control board 91 that controls the main game. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 92 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 95 provided in the main controller 81, and a payout controller 87 is connected. A power supply/emission control device 88 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 95 , and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 34a, 35a, 37d, 54, 68 and 69 (hereinafter referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 69) are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. FIG. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 include the detection sensor 32a provided in the first operating section 32, the detection sensor 54 provided in the second operating section 33, and the detection sensor 34a provided in the through winning section 34 for a special figure. , a detection sensor 35a provided in the distribution through prize winning unit 35, a count detection sensor 68 and a V prize detection sensor 69 provided in the distribution prize winning device 36, and a special electric prize detection sensor 37d provided in the special electric prize winning device 37 is included. In addition, detection sensors provided in the general prize winning section 31 are included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 32a to 69, the MPU 92 determines the winning of each winning-corresponding ball winning section. In addition, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operating section 32 and the second operating section 33 .

The output side of the MPU 92 is connected with a power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 87 and a sound emission control device 101. FIG. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 87 based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. When receiving the prize ball command, the payout control device 87 drives and controls the payout device 86 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command is paid out. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 101 .

On the output side of the MPU 92, a guide driving section 56 switches the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 between the non-guiding state and the guiding state (in other words, opens and closes the entrance section 53a of the second operating section 33). , a drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance that opens and closes the distribution side opening/closing member 62 of the distribution winning device 36, and a switching device that displaces the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 between the retracted position and the V guidance position. A drive unit 67, a special electric drive unit 37c for opening and closing the special electric side opening/closing member 37b of the special electric winning device 37, a special electric unit 42 and a general electric unit 43 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display section 42a, a special figure reservation display section 42b and a distribution display section 42c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU92. Similarly, the normal map unit 43 is provided with a normal map display unit 43a and a normal map reservation display unit 43b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU92. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, when the induction state of the guidance unit 52 is won, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the guide driving section 56 so that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state, and when the return condition to the non-induction state is satisfied. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the induction unit 52 is returned to the non-induction state. Further, when the opening start condition of the distribution entrance 61 is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a driving signal to the driving unit 63 for the distribution entrance so that the distribution entrance 61 is in an open state, When the condition for closing the sorting inlet 61 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped to bring the sorting inlet 61 into a closed state. Further, when the conditions for starting the guidance to the V winning path area 65c are established in the allocation execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the switching driving section 67 so that the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guidance position. , the output of the drive signal is stopped and the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position when the return condition to the retracted position is satisfied. Further, when the conditions for starting the opening of the big winning hole 37a are established in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 92 sends a drive signal to the drive unit 37c for the special electric so that the big winning hole 37a becomes an open state in which game balls can win. When the closing condition of the big winning hole 37a is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the big winning hole 37a is brought into a closed state in which the winning of game balls is impossible. Further, in each game round, during the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35, and in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 performs display control of the special figure unit 42. FIG. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not the guidance unit 52 is to be in the guidance state is specified, the MPU 92 performs display control of the general figure unit 43 .

The blackout monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power/launch controller 88, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch controller 88, which is a DC stable 24 volts. The payout control device 87 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 86 based on prize ball commands input from the MPU 92 of the main control device 81 .

The power supply/emission control device 88 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a game hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control device 81, the payout control device 87, etc. are each generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied.

More specifically, the power supply/launch control device 88 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 88a and a power-off power supply unit 88b. The power-on power supply unit 88a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power. It has the function to The power-off power supply unit 88b is composed of a capacitor, and supplies electric power from the power-on power supply unit 88a when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (when power is being supplied from an external power supply). is charged by In addition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power failure state (when the power supply from the external power supply is interrupted) such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply during power failure 88b discharges the main power. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 81 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 87 . Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 and the RAM of the payout control device 87 is not erased while the backup power is supplied from the power supply unit 88b for power failure. stored in memory.

Here, the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout controller 87 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, the backup power is supplied from the power supply section 88b for during power interruption to these RAMs as described above, so that even when there is no power supply from the power supply section 88a for during power supply, the current game can be played. It is possible to store and hold the state, progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are not supplied with backup power from the power supply during power failure 88b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 88a is stopped. erased.

A relatively large capacity is ensured for the power supply section 88b for power failure, and the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 before the power failure is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one day or two days). be. The power supply section 88b for power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like.

The power supply/launch control device 88 is provided with a power failure power supply unit (not shown) that is different from the power failure power supply unit 88b. In the power supply/launch control device 88, even after the stable 24 volt DC power supply becomes less than 22 volts, by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure, It is configured to maintain the 5-volt output, which is the drive power source for the control system, at a normal value. As a result, the main controller 81 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply/fire control device 88 is provided with a fire control section 88c in addition to various power supply sections 88a and 88b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 88c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is sent to the firing control unit 88c. output to Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the shooting control section 88c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operating handle. In addition, the firing control unit 88c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. to grasp the amount of rotation operation.

The launch control unit 88c transmits a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 of the main control unit 81 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 88c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. is received from the push sensor 28b, a HI level condition establishment signal (signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 92 . If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 92 . However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition establishment signal corresponding to the establishment of the condition.

In the MPU 92, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the shooting of the game ball can be permitted, a HI level firing permission signal (a signal corresponding to the firing permission) is sent to the firing control unit 88c. continue to send. When the MPU 92 does not receive a HI level condition establishment signal from the firing control section 88c, the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to firing permission). The relationship between level and HI level may be reversed.

The shooting control unit 88c is electrically connected to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and when receiving the HI level shooting permission signal from the MPU 92, drives and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 27 periodically. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball shooting mechanism 27, one game ball is shot to the game area PA in a specific shooting period (specifically 0.6 sec). . In addition, since the shooting intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of shooting, the game ball is shot with intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle.

The audio emission control device 101 includes an audio emission control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 103, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104. A RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 103 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 based on the command received from the main control device 81 and also transmits the command to the display control device 111 .

The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113 is mounted. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 113, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 114. A RAM 115, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. The MPU 113 controls the pattern display device 44 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 101 .

In addition to the MPU 113, the display control board 112 also includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 44 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and causes the pattern display device 44 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 44 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 44, and the display content of the pattern display device 44 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the main controller 81 are referred to as the main MPU 92, the main ROM 93 and the main RAM 94, and the MPU 103, ROM 104 and RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 are referred to as sound and light. The side MPU 103, the sound and light side ROM 104 and the sound and light side RAM 105 are called, and the MPU 113, the ROM 114 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 are called the display side MPU 113, the display side ROM 114 and the display side RAM 115.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side MPU 92 uses various counter information during the game to set the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display unit 42a, the lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 44, the general symbol display unit 43a, and more specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for lottery of winning generation and a type counter C2 used for determining the type of winning. , a distribution counter C3 used for the lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a game in the special figure display unit 42a and the pattern display device 44 and a variation type counter CS used when determining the variable display period of times. Furthermore, a general electric random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 should be in the guidance state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 94. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds "1" to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 provided in the main side RAM 94 when the winning to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 occurs. . The special figure reservation area 122 is provided with a first area 123a, a second area 123b, a third area 123c and a fourth area 123d, and according to the winning history of the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33, Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in one of the areas 123a to 123d as the reserved information on the first special figure side.

In this case, in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, when the winning of the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 123a→second area 123b→ Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the third area 123c→fourth area 123d. Since the four areas 123a to 123d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 123 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

In the special figure reservation area 122, an execution area 124 for special figures is provided in addition to the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d. The execution area 124 for the special figure is an area in which reservation information of a target for judging whether or not the special figure is to be determined and the type determination is stored when the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a. To the special figure execution area 124, the hold information stored in the first area 123a is shifted when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 42a.

Information corresponding to the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a prize to the distribution through prize winning section 35 occurs. The distribution execution area 125 is an area in which numerical information for determining the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is stored when the distribution execution mode in the distribution winning device 36 is started. In the distribution execution area 125, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period in which the prize winning in the distribution through prize section 35 is valid, a distribution counter C3 is displayed. is stored.

Information corresponding to the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general general drawing reservation area 126 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a prize to the special drawing through winning section 34 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 126 includes a first area 127a, a second area 127b, a third area 127c and a fourth area 127d. The numerical information of C4 is stored in one of the areas 127a to 127d as reserved information on the normal map side.

In this case, in the first area 127a to the fourth area 127d, when winning to the special figure thru winning section 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area 127a→second area 127b→third area 127c → Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area 127d. By providing the four areas 127a to 127d in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the special figure through winning section 34 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing reservation area 126 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more. may be

The normal map reservation area 126 is provided with an execution area 128 for the normal map. The execution area 128 for the normal map is an area in which pending information to be used for determination of propriety for guidance is stored when the variable display is started in the normal map display unit 43a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 43a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 127a of the normal map reservation area 126 is shifted to the execution area 128 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C4 will be described. The general electric random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 250" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general electric random number counter C4 at that point in time is stored in the general drawing reservation area 126 at the timing when the game ball wins in the special drawing through winning section 34.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the guidance unit 52 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general electrical random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as the support mode so that the guidance unit 52 has different support modes. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency of the guidance unit 52 being in the guidance state per unit time is relatively high when compared with a situation in which game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so as to be relatively high and low.

The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the induction state in the induction state lottery using the general electric random number counter C4 (for example, both 4/5), but the high frequency support mode , the number of times that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the guidance state in one guidance control execution time. The upper limit induction period is set long. In this case, when the guidance state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance state of the guidance unit 52 occurs multiple times, the closing period from the end of one guidance state to the start of the next guidance state is , is set shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next induction state lottery after one induction state lottery is performed (that is, the normal figure display unit 43a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation unit 33 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation unit 32 is higher than in the second operation unit 33, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is more likely than the first operation unit 32. The probability of winning the part 33 is increased. When a winning to the second operation unit 33 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the induced state per unit time is not limited to the above. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. In addition, the time secured after one guidance state lottery is performed and the next guidance state lottery is performed In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of times the induction state is executed is increased, the upper limit induction period is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured after one induction state lottery is performed and the next induction state lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. .

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of "0 to 399" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 399). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the value of the winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation part 32 or the second operation part 33. - 特許庁Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, determination of winning or losing is performed.

The value of the random number that will be won in the judgment of success or failure is stored in the main ROM 93 as a success or failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as win/fail lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in winning is ten. On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in winning is twenty. As long as the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary. In the case of a winning result, a prize valid period occurs during which the prize winning to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution becomes effective, and distribution is executed with the occurrence of the prize winning to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution as a trigger. mode will be changed.

The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of winning results are set. These multiple winning results are divided into (1) a winning lottery mode in a winning lottery after the end of the branch execution mode or after the end of the opening/closing execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and (2) without transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It is set by providing a difference between the two conditions, that is, the support mode in the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 after the end of the branch execution mode or after the end of the open/close execution mode.

The distribution destination of the winning result for the type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a type table. And, as such a distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result and a high probability jackpot result are set. Specifically, in the type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 15" corresponds to a low probability result, and "16 to 29" is a high probability result. Yes.

The low-probability result is that the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the branch execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This is the result. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The high-probability result is that after the branch execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This is the result. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the winning lottery result becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the through prize-winning section 35 for sorting shifts accordingly.

In addition, in relation to each game state, the normal game state does not mean the winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode, and the win-fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. It refers to a state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

The sorting counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 29" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The distribution counter C3 is periodically updated, and at the timing when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the value of the distribution counter C3 at that time is changed. It is stored in the execution area 125 for allocation. Then, the distribution execution mode is executed in an execution mode corresponding to the numerical information stored in the execution area 125 for distribution.

Here, in the distribution execution mode, a predetermined number of times the distribution entrance 61 is opened with a predetermined distribution open period as an upper limit is executed a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined distribution side upper limit It continues until one of the conditions that the number of game balls wins in the sorting winning device 36 is satisfied. Moreover, one opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is set in a plurality of types by differentiating the distribution opening period from when the distribution entrance 61 is opened to when it is closed. Specifically, the distribution-side long-term mode in which the distribution open period is set to 29 seconds, which is a long period, and the distribution-side middle mode in which the distribution open period is set to 15 seconds, which is a medium time shorter than the above-mentioned long period. A period mode and a short-term mode in which the distribution release period is set to 0.5 sec, which is a short time shorter than the middle time, are set. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. In addition, the distribution side upper limit number in the distribution execution mode is set to ten. Then, in the distribution-side long-term mode and the distribution-side medium-term mode among the above-described open modes, the distribution-open period is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the distribution-side upper limit number. It will happen. On the other hand, in the sorting-side short-term mode, a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the sorting-side upper limit number, more specifically, a sorting open period of time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. It is Therefore, when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution side long-term mode or the distribution side medium-term mode, prizes corresponding to the distribution side upper limit number are generated at the distribution entrance 61. Therefore, it is expected that no prize will be awarded to the distribution entrance 61 when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution side short-term mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of execution modes of the distribution execution mode are set. Specifically, a first distribution execution mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened only once in the distribution-side long-term mode, and a distribution-side short-term mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened once. After that, there is a second distribution execution mode in which the distribution entrance 61 is opened once according to the distribution side middle period mode.

The operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIGS. 8(a1) and 8(a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIGS. 8(b1) and 8(b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 8(c2) show the period during which the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is arranged at the V-leading position.

First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8(A). At the timing t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8(a1), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8(b1). In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, opening is performed in the distribution-side long-term mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started, and as shown in FIG. position. After that, at timing t3, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has passed from timing t2, and the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 8(c1).

In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution entrance 61 is executed in the distribution side long-term mode, and the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position is determined in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. Even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning the prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 from before the start of the first distribution execution mode, the number of winning prizes to the distribution prize winning device 36 surely reaches the distribution side upper limit number. It's time not to. Therefore, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 61 will win a prize in the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is reliably guided to the passage area 65c and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. - 特許庁When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the first distribution execution mode is finished.

After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8(b1) and shown in FIG. 8(a1). Thus, the first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period elapses, the distribution entrance 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t4 and the first Distributed execution mode ends. However, even in this case, as already explained, the first distribution execution mode ends after the game ball is guided to the V winning path area 65c.

Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 8(B). At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8(a2), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8(b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the number of opening times of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. The distribution opening period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened to when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V-induction position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8(b2) and 8(c2), at timing t12, which is timing prior to timing t13, which is timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position, the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Closed. However, even if the distribution entrance 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is continued without ending.

After that, at timing t13, which is the situation in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution inlet 61 continues to be closed, a predetermined After a lapse of time (for example, 3 seconds), the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V-guided position as shown in FIG. 8(c2). After that, at timing t14 in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution entrance 61 continues to be closed, a V-induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 8(c2).

In this case, in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode, so no winning to the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Also, even if a prize is awarded to the distribution prize winning device 36, the game ball that enters the distribution prize winning device 36 at the timing when the first open round ends and normally flows down is branched in the distribution prize winning device 36. The longest period required to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the path 65 is the period from the end of the first opening turn to the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position. shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, even if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode, the game ball may be detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. sex is low. Since the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is not started after the second apportionment execution mode ends.

At the timing t15, which is the timing after the timing t14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 8(b2). . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 correspond to the distribution-side intermediate period mode. After that, at the timing of t16, the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution side middle period mode elapses, and the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 8(b2), and shown in FIG. 8(a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends. When the distribution entrance 61 is opened in the distribution-side intermediate period mode, the number of prizes awarded to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution-side upper limit number during the distribution open period of the distribution-side intermediate period mode. obtain. Then, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side middle period mode elapses, at a timing earlier than the timing of t16. The distribution entrance 61 is closed and the second distribution execution mode ends.

As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 is normally launched, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball. The open/close execution mode occurs after the end of the one-distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. Therefore, the open/close execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. As a result, the player expects that the first distribution execution mode will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Incidentally, in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that the opening times in which the large winning opening 37a is opened is executed a predetermined number of times with a predetermined special electric open period as the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is the large winning opening. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning 37a is met. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode is set to 15 times, and in each round game, the special electric signal opening period is 29 seconds, and the opening of the big winning opening 37a whose upper limit number is 10 is 1. is executed only once. In this case, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player as already explained. Since it is controlled, the special electric discharge period in each round game is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if game balls aimed at winning a prize to the special electric prize winning device 37 are normally launched, a number of game balls equal to or larger than the upper limit number will win the big prize winning opening 37a in each round game. Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 37 is paid out each time a prize is awarded to the big prize winning port 37a. Therefore, when a shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of an increase in the number of game balls that the player can use.

In addition, even if any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode occurs, the distribution side upper limit number of game balls to the distribution winning device 36 will win in the corresponding distribution execution mode. can occur. Therefore, the total number of prizes awarded to the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode can be the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to make the total number of game balls to be put out the same or substantially the same in these branch execution modes. As a result, even if the second distribution execution mode is basically not accompanied by a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the increase in the number of game balls that the player can use is the same as in the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to obtain a profit, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage for the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

The mode of selection of the distribution execution mode for the distribution counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a distribution table. Specifically, in the distribution table, among the values of the distribution counter C3 of "0 to 29", "0 to 2" correspond to the first distribution execution mode, and "3 to 29" correspond to the first distribution execution mode. It corresponds to the second distribution execution mode. That is, the selection probability is set lower in the first distribution execution mode than in the second distribution execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may have the same or substantially the same selection probability, and the second distribution execution mode may be the first distribution execution mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection probability is set lower than in the one-distribution execution mode.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 198" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side MPU 92 determines the variation display period in the special figure display section 42a. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display section 42a.

<Regarding the relationship between the flow of the game and the contents displayed on the symbol display device 44>
Next, the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents on the symbol display device 44 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display contents on the symbol display device 44. As shown in FIG.

In a situation where none of the game times, the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode are executed, the game ball is placed in either the first operating section 32 or the second operating section 33 is won, or if the reservation information is reserved and stored in the special drawing reservation area 122, as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, the variable display of the pattern is started in the special figure display section 42a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9A, the pattern display device 44 also starts an effect for the game cycle.

FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning effective period of the game round and distribution through winning section 35 and the display contents of the symbol display device 44 in the distribution execution mode. In the following description, the period during which the game times, the prize-winning effective period of the distribution-use through-winning section 35, and the distribution execution mode are executed are also referred to as the unit variation execution period.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), during the unit variation execution period, the pattern display device 44 has three variation display areas 131, a first variation display area 131, a second variation display area 132 and a third variation display area 133. .about.133 are set. In each of these three variable display areas 131-133, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. As these plural kinds of symbols, 9 kinds of symbols with numbers "1" to "9" are set. When the patterns are varied and displayed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133, nine types of patterns are sequentially displayed in ascending numerical order in any of the variable display areas 131 to 133. FIG. After the symbol "9" is displayed, the symbol to be displayed returns to the symbol "1". The first variable display region 131 and the second variable display region 132 are set side by side in the upper region of the display surface of the pattern display device 44, and the third variable display region 133 on the display surface of the pattern display device 44 is the first variable display region. The area below the display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 is set so as to include the center position in the horizontal direction.

When the success/failure determination process is executed for the reserved information on the special figure side in the main MPU 92 and the effect for the game round is started, that is, when the unit variation execution period is started, shown in FIG. 9 (A) As described above, the variable display of the symbols is started in all of the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133 in the symbol display device 44. FIG. After that, the variable display of the symbols is sequentially stopped in the order of the first variable display area 131→the second variable display area 132→the third variable display area 133. FIG. In this case, if the prize winning effective period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 does not occur, the symbol display device 44 does not display the reach fluctuation as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 is terminated without stopping the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the combination of the winning symbols.

9 ( As shown in c) and FIG. 9(C), a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed when the stop symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 are the same symbol, and in that situation, the third variation is displayed. In the display area 133, the reach variable display is performed in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In other words, in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132, the stop result after the variable display of the pattern corresponds to the result of the validity determination process for the reservation information on the special figure side, and the result of the validity determination process is hit. When the result is not the result, the same symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132, and when the result of the winning/failure determination process is the winning result, the first variation display area. The same pattern is stopped and displayed in 131 and the second variable display area 132 .

The timing at which the reach variation display is started on the symbol display device 44 corresponds to the end timing of the effect for the game cycle, and the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started at this timing. When the valid winning period of the distribution through winning section 35 is started, as shown in FIG. A winning target notification image 134 is displayed to notify that the player should aim for a prize. In the winning target notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operation portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 An image is displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode, and furthermore, an image indicating that a prize in the distribution through prize winning section 35 should be aimed at is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is the valid winning period of the through winning section 35 for sorting. Therefore, it becomes easy to carry out a shooting operation aimed at winning a prize in the through prize-winning portion 35 for sorting.

A shooting operation aimed at winning a prize to the distribution through prize winning section 35 is performed, and as shown in FIG. Judgment processing is executed. When the target selected in the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 starts the first distribution execution mode as shown in FIG. 9(e). Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. Further, even when the first distribution execution mode is started, the display of the winning target notification image 134 is continued together with the reach variation display. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the sorting through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that the player should aim for the distribution through prize-winning section 35 to an image indicating that the player should aim for the distribution prize-winning device 36 . The contents of the prize-winning notification image 134 are the same when the second allocation execution mode is started.

As already explained, the game ball is basically detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first allocation execution mode. As shown in FIG. 9(f), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the variable display of the pattern in the third variable display area 133 ends even during the first distribution execution mode. do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9D, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is a symbol forming a combination of ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. be. That is, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 ends in a state in which the combination of winning symbols is stopped and displayed even in the middle of the allocation execution mode. It will happen. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur.

After that, when the first distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. 9(g). When the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the symbol display device 44 starts a display effect corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode in a state in which the prize-winning notification image 134 is displayed. In the winning aim notification image 134, the special figure through winning portion 34, the distribution through winning portion 35, the second operating portion 33, the special electric winning device 37 and The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special figure thru winning unit 34, the distribution thru winning unit 35, the second operation unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distribution winning device 36 The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that a prize to the distribution prize-winning device 36 should be aimed to an image indicating that a prize to the special electric prize-winning device 37 should be aimed. The content of the prize-winning notification image 134 is the same when the game ball is detected by the V-winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode and the open/close execution mode is generated.

On the other hand, when the target selected in the distribution determination process of the main MPU 92 is the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 starts the second distribution execution mode as shown in FIG. 9(h). be done. Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. As already explained, in the second distribution execution mode basically no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, so basically the opening and closing execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. Also, at the timing when the second distribution execution mode ends, the variable display of the pattern in the third variable display area 133 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9E, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is the symbol forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. are different designs. In other words, when the distribution execution mode ends without detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 ends without the combination of winning symbols being stopped and displayed. Become. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will not occur. Even if the first distribution execution mode occurs, if the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball, the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, so the combination of the winning symbols is stopped and displayed. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is ended without being executed.

Here, even if the second distribution execution mode is executed in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. detection can occur. For example, in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is first opened once in the distribution side short term mode. Winning to the minute winning device 36 occurs, and the winning game ball stays for some reason on the upstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b, and the switching piece 66 moves to the V guiding position. It is conceivable that by reaching the branch position after being arranged, it will be guided to the V winning path area 65c. Such an event can occur due to ball jamming or the like even when a game is played legally, and can also occur due to fraudulent behavior.

As shown in FIG. 9(j), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the pattern in the third variable display area 133 of the pattern display device 44 is displayed even during the second distribution execution mode. The fluctuation display of ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9F, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is the symbol forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132. are different designs. In other words, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second allocation execution mode, the combination of winning symbols is not stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44 . Furthermore, the stop symbol in the third variable display area 133 is a symbol that is not included in the symbols to be displayed when the variable display of the symbol is performed in the third variable display area 133. Specifically, " The pattern is "E". This symbol is stopped and displayed only when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second allocation execution mode. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player and the manager of the game hall that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in spite of the second allocation execution mode.

After that, when the second distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. 9(k). In the opening/closing execution mode, although the prize-winning notification image 134 corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode already explained in the pattern display device 44 is displayed, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode is not started. Instead, the display mode of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 9(E) is maintained. Thus, it is possible to clearly notify that the opening/closing execution mode is generated from the second branch execution mode even during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode is different from the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode.

The execution manner of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode and the execution manner of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11(A) shows the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode, and FIG. 11(B) shows the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode. Also, FIG. 11(a) shows the period during which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and FIG. 11(A) and 11(B) show a case where the maximum number of winnings to the special electric winning device 37 does not occur in each round game.

First, with reference to FIG. 11(A), the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the first allocation execution mode will be described.

At the timing of t1, the opening/closing execution mode is entered, and at the timing of t2 when the special electric opening period T1 has passed, opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the first round game is started. Also, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t3 when the special electric open period T2 has passed. After that, at the timing of t4 when the first special electric closing period T3 (specifically 2 sec) has elapsed, the opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the second round game is started. Then, at timing t5 to timing t10, closing of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the special electric power open period T2 and opening of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the first special power electric power closing period T3 are repeated.

After that, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started at the timing of t11, which is the timing when the special electric open period T2 in the last round game has passed. Then, at timing t12 when the ending period T4 has passed, the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the manner of execution of the opening/closing execution mode generated from the second allocation execution mode will be described.

At the timing of t21, the opening/closing execution mode is entered, and at the timing of t22, which is the timing after the special electric opening period T1, which is the same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 37 in the first round game is activated. opening is started. In addition, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing of t23, which is the timing after the special electric open period T2, which is the same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

After that, at the timing of t24 when the second special electric closing period T5 (specifically, 60 sec) longer than the first special electric closing period T3 has passed, the opening of the special electric winning device 37 in the second round game is started. . Then, at the timing of t25 to t30, the closing of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the special electric power open period T2 and the opening of the special electric prize winning device 37 with the elapse of the second electric power closing period T5 are repeated.

After that, the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started at the timing of t31, which is the timing when the special electric open period T2 in the last round game has passed. Then, at the timing of t32, which is the timing after the ending period T4, which is the same as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

As described above, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the special electric closing period between rounds is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting section 73 and the speaker section 74, informs to that effect. As a result, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of the fact during the opening/closing execution mode, and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with it. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the utilization rate of the opening/closing execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent act can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of profit obtained per hit.

Also, the period during which the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation in which the game ball is shot, etc., by lengthening the closed period, opening and closing triggered by the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably extend the execution mode for a long time.

Further, instead of lengthening the opening/closing execution mode only by lengthening the ending period, the special electric closing period of timing before the last round game is lengthened to lengthen the opening/closing execution mode. It is designed to be As a result, when the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by a fraudulent act, the fraudulent act is dealt with at a stage before the payout of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to

In addition, the upper limit number of each round game and the special electric open period are the same in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode, in contrast to the case where the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode as a result of regular play rather than by cheating. It is possible to make the payout of game balls equivalent to .

<Regarding various processes executed by the main MPU 92>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 92 to progress the game will be described. The processing of the main MPU 92 can be roughly classified into main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 second elapses after the main process is activated without proceeding to the next process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 94 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM deletion button provided in the power supply/launch control device 88 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 94. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase button is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main-side RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 87 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 87 .

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining processing, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S110). Also, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 94, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S113). After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a period of 4 msec.

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 95, and when the occurrence of power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the sorting counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After that, as in step S111, random number initial value update processing is executed (step S203), and as in step S112, variation counter update processing is executed (step S204). After that, game stop determination processing is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. After that, on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 37c, 56, 63 and 67 is executed. For example, when the information to switch the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution winning device 36 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the driving unit 63 for the distribution entrance should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 to the V-leading position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching driving section 67 is started, and the information for switching to the retracted position is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the guidance unit 52 of the second operating section 33 to the guidance state is set, the output of the drive signal to the guide driving section 56 is started, and the information for switching to the non-guidance state is set. If so, the output of the driving signal to the guide driving section 56 is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, winning detection processing is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, signals received from various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 are read, and general winning section 31, first operating section 32, second operating section 33, through special drawing winning section 34, distribution A process for specifying whether or not there is a prize to the through-prize winning unit 35, the distribution prize winning device 36, and the special electric prize winning device 37 is executed.

After that, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 94 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S211). In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, setting for game stop is performed in the above step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S212). In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 28, one game ball is shot every 0.6 sec so as to have a predetermined shooting cycle, as already explained.

After that, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 33a to 59b and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed (step S213).

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round in the special figure display unit 42a, display control of the distribution display unit 42c, execution control of the distribution execution mode and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed ( step S214). In addition, the guidance unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 is a guidance propriety judgment for determining whether or not to be in the guidance state, and a normal diagram for switching the guidance unit 52 between the guidance state and the non-guidance state. A power control process is executed (step S215). In the general/universal power supply control process, if the prize effective period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35 is not in the distribution execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is supported. If the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, display control and guidance of the normal-map display unit 43a are performed according to the content corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. Drive control of the unit 52 is performed. In addition, in the general-to-universal power control process, if the prize-winning effective period of the distribution through prize-winning unit 35, the distribution execution mode, or the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is high-frequency support until just before that Set the support mode to the low-frequency support mode regardless of whether or not it was set to the mode. As a result, the guide unit 52 prevents the flow of game balls directed to the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode or the flow of game balls directed to the special electric prize winning device 37 in the opening/closing execution mode. becomes possible.

After that, based on the processing results of step S214 to step S215 immediately before, the setting of the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of the reservation information on the special figure side to the special figure reservation display unit 42b, and the reservation information on the general figure side The output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number in the general pattern reservation display section 43b is set (step S216). In addition, based on the processing result of step S214 to step S215 just before, setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a, the output information for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c Setting and setting of output information for updating the display contents of the normal map display unit 43a are performed (step S216).

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 87 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S217). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output object is executed (step S218). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S219).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S219 is executed, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 has occurred, the processing for acquiring the special figure side reservation information is executed, and the special figure side reservation When the information is stored, a decision is made as to whether or not the reservation information is valid, and further, with the decision as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for a game cycle is executed. In addition, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a winning result, the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is generated after the performance for the game round is executed, and the distribution through prize winning section 35 is generated during the prize valid period. When a prize has been won, a process for shifting to a sorting execution mode is executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, a process of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the distribution execution mode ends.

Concretely, in special figure special electric control processing first execution of reservation information acquisition processing of special figure side (step S301). In the special figure side hold information acquisition process, in a situation where the number of special figure side hold information stored in the special figure reservation area 122 is less than the upper limit storage number To the first operation unit 32 or the second operation unit 33 When the winning occurs, the value of the random number counter C1 and the value of the type counter C2 are used as the reservation information on the special figure side, and the special figure side in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d of the first special figure reservation area 123 It is stored in the area on the side of the earlier consumption order among the areas in which the pending information is not stored. In addition, when the reservation information on the special figure side is acquired, data for updating the display contents of the special figure reservation display unit 42b in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the special figure side has increased this time Make settings. Moreover, when the hold information on the special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 . As a result, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the special figure in the design display device 44 is updated corresponding to the new acquisition of the reserved information on the side of the special figure.

Then, the special figure special electric address table memorize|stored in main side ROM93 is read (step S302). In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set. The special figure special electric counter is a counter for specifying the processing contents to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main side MPU 92 .

The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game cycle, a process for controlling the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and a process for controlling the distribution execution mode. and processing for controlling the open/close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305) which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and for advancing the effect for the game round Special figure fluctuation process (step S306), which is the process of , and special figure determination process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, a distribution standby process (step S308) is set as a process for controlling the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35. FIG. In addition, as processing for controlling the distribution execution mode, distribution start processing (step S309), which is processing for controlling the opening of the distribution execution mode, and control of the period after the opening of the distribution execution mode A distribution process (step S310), which is a process for doing so, is set. Further, as processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, special electric start processing (step S311) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 37. special electric open processing (step S312), special electric closed processing (step S313) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 37, the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and the end of the opening and closing execution mode A special electric end process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state, is set.

The special special electric counter can take a value of "0" to "9", and each value of "0" to "9" corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA9 of each process (step S305 to step S314). ing. Specifically, when the special figure special electric counter value is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305) is executed, and when the special figure special electric counter value is "1" When the figure fluctuation process (step S306) is executed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure confirmation process (step S307) is performed, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is " 3", the distribution standby process (step S308) is executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "4", the distribution start process (step S309) is executed, When the value of the special special electric counter is "5", the distribution processing (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "6", special electric start processing (step S311) is to be executed, and if the value of the special special electric counter is "7", the special electric open processing (step S312) will be executed, and if the value of the special electric electric counter is "8", the special electric will be closed The medium processing (step S313) is to be executed, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "9", the special electric end processing (step S314) is to be executed.

In the special special electric control process, after reading the special special electric address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric address table (step S303), and the acquired Jump to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Hereinafter, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305), special figure fluctuation processing (step S306), special figure determination processing (step S307), distribution standby processing (step S308), distribution start processing (step S309 ), distribution processing (step S310), special electric start processing (step S311), special electric open processing (step S312), special electric closed processing (step S313), and special electric end processing (step S314) will be described separately.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of pieces of reservation information on the special figure side is one or more (step S401: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S402). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 123a of the special figure reservation area 122 is moved to the execution area 124 for the special figure. Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of the special figure reservation area 122 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 123a to 123d to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of first area 123a, third area 123c→second area 123b, fourth area 123d→third area 123c. Also, in the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display contents of the special figure reservation display section 42b are updated in accordance with the fact that the number of the reservation information on the special figure side has decreased this time. Also, in the data setting process, a hold decrease command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 . Thereby, the image for notifying the reserved storage number of the reserved information on the side of the special figure in the symbol display device 44 is updated corresponding to the decrease of the reserved information on the side of the special figure.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety determination process is executed (step S403). In the success/failure determination process, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is read from the main ROM 93. read from After reading the success/failure table, the information for success/failure determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the above-mentioned success/failure table. is matched with any of the numerical information set as the winning result.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result (step S404: YES), the type determination process is executed (step S405). In the type determination process, the type table is read from the main ROM 93, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the type counter C2 is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical value is read. It is determined whether the information corresponds to either the low-probability result or the high-probability result set in the type table.

After executing the type determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main side RAM 94 corresponding to the type of winning result specified in the type determination process (step S406). Specifically, when it corresponds to the low probability hit result, the low probability flag is set to "1", and when it corresponds to the high probability hit result, the high probability flag is set to "1". . In the following description, the process of determining whether or not there are various winning results is performed by determining whether or not the corresponding flag in the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". Further, when "1" is set in step S406, the game state transition processing is executed when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends or when the opening/closing execution mode ends. Cleared to "0" when

After executing the winning result flag setting process, the winning result stop result setting process is executed (step S407). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main side ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . In the stop result table for the winning result, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a are set differently for each type of winning result. The main side RAM 94 stores the information of the stop mode of the pattern according to the type of the winning result specified by . The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the winning results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for winning results for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is not a winning result (step S404: NO), a stopping result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S408). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the game round this time is specified from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main ROM 93, and the The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of a winning result.

After executing one of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S409). In the process of specifying the variable display period, a process for specifying the variable display period of the game round is executed. Specifically, first, the variable display period table corresponding to the support mode in the current game round and the results of the success/failure determination process and the type determination process is read from the main ROM 93 . These variable display time tables are set so that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when the result of the hit/fail determination process is a hit result than when the result is a loss result, and the result of the type determination process is high. If it is a definite hit result, it is set to be easier to select a longer variable display period than if it is a low definite hit result, and if the result of the success/failure determination process is an off result, the number of reserved information on the special figure side It is set so that a longer variable display period is more likely to be selected when there is less than when there is more, and when the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result, the high-frequency support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A longer fluctuation display period is set to facilitate selection, and if the result of the pass/fail judgment process is an outlier, the fluctuation is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. The display period is set so that it is easy to select. By setting the table for the variable display period in this way, the average value of the variable display period is longer when the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result than when the result is a losing result. If the result of the type determination process is a high probability result, the average value of the variable display period will be longer than if the result is a low probability result. The average value of the variable display period is longer when the number of pending information is smaller than when it is large. The average value of the variable display period is longer than in the case where the variable display period is longer, and if the result of the pass/fail judgment process is an outlier, the variable display period is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. longer average. Note that the average value of the variable display periods as a whole is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect for the game round on the pattern display device 44 is such that the game round with a longer variable display period increases the player's sense of expectation. For example, the number of characters for effect that appears increases in game rounds with a longer variable display period.

Information on the variable display period specified by the variable display period specifying process is set in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 94 . When the variable display period information is set in the timer counter, every time the timer update process (step S210) of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed until the value of the timer counter becomes "0" subtracted.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S410). The variable command includes information on the variable display period specified in step S409. The type command includes information on game results (results of winning/failure determination processing and results of type determination processing).

Thereafter, after reading the variation display table for the special figure display section 42a from the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94 (step S411), the variation display of the design is started in the special figure display section 42a (step S412). The variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is a table in which the variation display pattern of the pattern in the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a is predetermined. When the variable display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the success/failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display section 42a, the variation display table for the special figure display section 42a is repeatedly used until the variation display period determined in step S409 elapses.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S413). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter that was added by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step S306).

<Processing content of the sound and light side MPU 103>
The variable display period information read out as described above is set in the command for variation and transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 as described above. A processing configuration for performing execution control of the effect for the game round by the sound and light side MPU 103 will be described below. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 103 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 92 is executed (step S501). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing table setting processing. If the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 92 (step S601: YES), the game result is stored (step S602). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the result of the win/fail judgment process and the type judgment process determined by the main side MPU 92 at the start of the current game cycle is specified, and the specified information is sent to the sound light. Write to the side RAM 105 .

After that, an effect lottery process for determining the content of the effect for the game round is executed (step S603). In the effect lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 44 is to perform an advance notice display in the current game round. The advance notice display is a situation in which the pattern is displayed in all of the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132, and the third variable display area 133 in the symbol display device 44, or the first variable display area. In 131, the variable display of the symbols is stopped, but in the situation where the variable display of the symbols is performed in both the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133, the state of the symbol display device 44 is displayed for advance notice. This is a display effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a winning result will occur in the current game round, in other words, the degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the current game round. The modes for the advance notice display include a mode in which the background image of the pattern display device 44 is used as a background image for the notice display, a mode in which a character image for the notice display is displayed, and a type of pattern that is variably displayed is used for the notice display. The aspect etc. which are made into a kind are mentioned.

In the effect lottery process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is read from the main side ROM 93, and the value of the lottery counter whose value is periodically updated is read out in the main side RAM 94. - 特許庁Then, the value of the lottery counter is collated against the present effect lottery table to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice display and the type of advance notice display to be executed. In this case, the game round corresponding to the winning result is set to have a higher probability of occurrence of the notice display than the game round corresponding to the losing result. In addition, it is easier to select a kind of advance notice display with a higher degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result than in the game round corresponding to the losing result. In addition, a game round corresponding to a high probability winning result is more likely to select a type of notice display with a higher degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed than a game round corresponding to a low probability winning result. Further, the longer the variable display period of the game cycle, the higher the probability of occurrence of the notice display is set, and the more likely it is to select the type of notice display with a high degree of expectation that the reach fluctuation display will be executed.

After executing the effect lottery process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S604). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is a result of losing, the result is a stop result in which the same symbols are not combined in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 of the symbol display device 44. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game round. In this case, since the prize-winning effective period of the distribution through prize-winning section 35 does not occur after the game round ends, not only the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 but also the third variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 In the display area 133 as well, the variable display of the symbols is ended. Therefore, as the stop result information in this case, not only the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 but also the third variable display area 133 determines the type of symbols to be stopped. The combination of the stop symbols in the first variable display area 131, the second variable display area 132 and the third variable display area 133 in the case of a misalignment result is determined by lottery while avoiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols and the combination of the same symbols. be done.

In addition, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low-probability result, a combination of the same even number of symbols is displayed in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 of the symbol display device 44. is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game cycle. In this case, after the game cycle ends and the prize winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 starts, the symbols are displayed in the third variable display area 133 in a state in which the ready-to-win symbols are formed by the same even symbols. will be displayed. The type of combination of ready-to-win symbols with even-numbered symbols is determined by lottery. Also, if the stop result of the current game cycle is a high-probability hit result, the stop result will be a combination of the same odd-numbered symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 in the symbol display device 44. The corresponding information is determined as the information of the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game cycle ends and the prize winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variable display area 133 in a state in which the ready-to-win symbols are formed by the same odd number symbols. will be displayed. The kind of combination of ready-to-win symbols with odd-numbered symbols is determined by lottery.

In addition, even if the result is a low probability hit result, a combination of reach symbols with the same odd number pattern can be formed, and even if the result is a high probability hit result, a combination of reach symbols with the same even number pattern may be formed. In this case, when the result is a high probability hit result, it is easier to select an odd number of patterns as a combination of reach patterns than when the result is a low probability hit result. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the result is a certain winning result. In addition, when the result is a low probability winning result, odd patterns are not selected as a combination of reach symbols, while when the result is a high probability winning result, an even number pattern or an odd number pattern is selected as a combination of reach patterns. may be In addition, instead of the configuration in which the combination of reach patterns with odd-numbered patterns corresponds to a high-probability result and the combination of reach-patterns with even-numbered patterns corresponds to a low-probability result, the pattern of "3" or the pattern of "7" A combination of ready-to-reach symbols by some symbols corresponds to a high-probability result, and a combination of ready-to-reach symbols by other symbols corresponds to a low-probability result.

After that, readout processing of the control table corresponding to the content of execution of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S605). In this process, information on the variable display period is specified from the content of the command for variation received this time, information on the variable display period, information on the game result specified in step S602, and the effect lottery in step S603. A control table corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the process and the stop result information determined in step S604 is read from the sound and light side ROM 104 and written to the sound and light side RAM 105. FIG. In the control table, the content of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the effect for the current game round and the content of sound output control of the speaker unit 74 corresponding to the effect for the current game round are set. Light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are performed according to the control table.

Thereafter, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S606). The variation pattern command includes information on the variable display period of the game round to be started, information on the combination of stop symbols, information on whether or not to execute the advance notice display, and if the advance notice display is executed, the execution target. Information on the type of advance notice display is included. When the display side MPU 113 receives the variation pattern command, the symbol display device 44 starts display control for executing the effect for the game round.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), after executing the table setting process, the command transmission process is executed (step S502). In the command transmission process, in a situation where the control table is read in the sound and light side RAM 105, when the transmission timing of the command set in the control table comes, the command of the type set in the control table is sent. to the display side MPU 113.

After that, light emission control processing is executed (step S503), and sound output control processing is executed (step S504). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 is performed according to the table read out to the sound and light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of step S501. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is performed according to the table read out to the sound/light side RAM 105 in the table setting process of step S501. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S505). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the table read out in the table setting process of step S501 to the data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of the display side MPU 113>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing execution control of an effect for a game cycle in the display side MPU 113. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec, by the display-side MPU 113 .

In the V interrupt process, if a command is received from the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S701: YES), the display pattern table corresponding to the received command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written to the display side RAM 115 (step S702). . For example, when a variation pattern command is received from the sound and light side MPU 103 , the display pattern table of the type corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written to the display side RAM 115 . This display pattern table contains the variable display period in the current game cycle, the type of combination of stop symbols, whether or not to execute advance notice display, and the type of advance notice display to be executed when the advance notice display is executed. Compatible with combinations. Therefore, display control is executed by the display-side MPU 113 according to the display pattern table, so that the symbol display device 44 executes the effect for the game round over the variable display period determined by the main-side MPU 92. When it is determined that the sound and light side MPU 103 executes the notice display, the kind of notice display determined by the sound and light side MPU 103 is executed by the symbol display device 44 during the performance for the game round. be done. Further, when the effect for the game cycle ends, the symbol display device 44 displays the combination of stop symbols determined by the sound and light side MPU 103 .

When a negative determination is made in step S701, or when the processing of step S702 is executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S703). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read out in step S702 to the data corresponding to the current control process. After that, task processing is executed (step S704). In the task processing, parameters necessary for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing on the pattern display device 44 are calculated. After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S705). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of an image corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created on the pattern display device 44, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 112. It is transmitted to the VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP creates drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM (not shown) according to this drawing list, thereby causing the pattern display device 44 to display an image for one frame.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S306 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the variation display period of the current game round in the special figure display section 42a has not passed (step S801: NO), and when it is time to update the display contents of the special figure display section 42a (step S802: YES) , Data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 42a by referring to the variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a read at step S411 in the special figure variation start process (Fig. 15) ( step S803). As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the time of starting the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the processing result of the processing result of the propriety determination process and the type determination process, It is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the game round effect on the symbol display device 44 . For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a.

On the other hand, when the variable display period has passed (step S801: YES), the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display section 42a stored in the main side RAM 94 at the start of the game round is read out (step S804). As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display section 42a. The mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 42a is the winning valid period of the distribution through winning unit 35, regardless of whether it is in the distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode, in the special figure display unit 42a This is maintained until the next pattern variation display is started. Also, information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S805). Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S806). When receiving the final stop command from the main MPU 92, the sound/light MPU 103 transmits the final stop command to the display MPU 113 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the final stop command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 stops and displays the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. Read the display pattern table for As a result, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game cycle is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44 over the final stop period.

Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S807). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special electric counter corresponds to the special figure fixed processing (step S307) by adding 1 becomes "2".

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step S307 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the final stop period has passed (step S901: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a loss result (step S902: NO), the value of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". (step S903). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

When the final stop period has passed (step S901: YES) and the game result of the current game cycle is a winning result (step S902: YES), the variation display table for the distribution display section 42c is displayed. After reading from the main-side ROM 93 to the main-side RAM 94 (step S904), the sorting display section 42c starts the variable display of the pattern (step S905). The variable display table for the sorting display unit 42c is a table in which pattern variable display patterns are predetermined when the sorting display unit 42c performs variable display of patterns. The same variable display table is used when the variable display of patterns is executed in the sorting display section 42c. When the variable display of patterns is performed in the sorting display section 42c, the variable display of patterns according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of patterns is performed in the sorting display section 42c, the variable display table for the sorting display section 42c is repeatedly used until the sorting execution mode ends.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S906). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure confirmation processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter that became the addition target by adding 1 is the distribution standby processing ( It becomes "3" corresponding to step S308).

Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S907). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the distribution display start command from the main side MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S607 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the distribution display start command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S608). Data for light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker section 74 are set in the control table during the winning valid period of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the winning effective period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the winning effective period. In addition, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S609). When the display side MPU 113 receives the distribution display start command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 reads out the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display during the winning valid period. . As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the prize-winning notification image 134 for notifying that the player should aim for the prize-winning of the distribution through prize-winning section 35, as described above.

<Distribution standby processing>
Next, the distribution standby process executed in step S308 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the distribution standby process, first, update processing of the distribution display section 42c is executed (step S1001). In the update process, when it is time to update the display contents of the distribution display section 42c, refer to the variation display table for the distribution display section 42c read in step S904 in the special figure finalization process (FIG. 20) is used to set data for updating the display contents of the distribution display section 42c. As a result, the display contents of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The pattern variation display start mode and pattern variation display update mode in the distribution display section 42c are the types of winning results in the immediately preceding game cycle and the duration of the pattern variation display in the distribution display section 42c. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effect on the pattern display device 44 and is performed in a fixed manner. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once and the display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeated, and when the sorting execution mode ends, the display Regardless of the order in which the patterns are displayed, the stop result corresponding to the game result in the distribution execution mode is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the distribution display section 42c.

After that, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution (step S1002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution occurs only in step S1002. As a result, the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 occurs only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

If a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S1002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1003). Then, using the numerical information stored in the allocation execution area 125, allocation determination processing is executed (step S1004). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches with any of

If the result of the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode (step S1005: YES), the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1006). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode by the main side MPU 92, If the value of the first distribution execution flag is "1", specify that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and if the value of the first distribution execution flag is "0", specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. The value of the first distribution execution flag is cleared to "0" when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

After that, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1007). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the first distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S610 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the first distribution command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S611). Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the first distribution execution mode are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. be done. In addition, the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to these 1st distribution execution modes differ from the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to the 2nd distribution execution mode. Also, the first distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S612). When the display side MPU 113 receives the first distribution command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), the display pattern for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the first distribution execution mode read the table. As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the first distribution execution mode among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode is to be executed this time. be done.

On the other hand, when the result of the distribution determination process is the second distribution execution mode (step S1005: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1008). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the second distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S613 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and outputs the control table corresponding to the second distribution command. It is read from the light-side ROM 104 to the sound/light-side RAM 105 (step S614). Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the second distribution execution mode are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. be done. In addition, the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to these second distribution execution modes are different from the light emission effect and sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Also, the second distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S615). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second distribution command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display pattern for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the second distribution execution mode read the table. As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the second distribution execution mode of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode is to be executed this time. be done.

After that, the timer counter of the main RAM 94 is set with the information of the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) (step S1009). As a result, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1010). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution standby processing is executed is "3", the value of the special special electric counter corresponds to the distribution start processing (step S309) by adding 1. It becomes "4".

<Distribution start processing>
Next, the distribution start processing executed in step S309 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the distribution start processing, first, the processing for updating the distribution display section 42c is executed (step S1101). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

In the distribution start process, when the opening period for distribution has passed (step S1102: YES) and the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1103: YES), "1" is set in the opening/closing number counter SOC provided in the main RAM 94, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1104). The opening/closing number counter SOC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution winning device 36 is opened and closed in the current distribution execution mode. The winning counter PC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number remaining in the distribution side upper limit number in the current distribution execution mode. Also, the first distribution open period (specifically, 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1105).

On the other hand, if the distribution opening period has passed (step S1102: YES) and the value of the first distribution execution flag in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S1103: NO), the main The opening/closing number counter SOC of the side RAM 94 is set to "2", and the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 is set to "10" (step S1106). Also, the second distribution open period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1107).

When the process of step S1105 or step S1107 is executed, the open setting process for distribution is executed (step S1108). In the open setting process, "1" is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance drive unit 63 in the main MPU 92 . As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance is started to switch the distribution entrance 61 to the open state. . In this case, after the process of step S1105 is executed, the distribution entrance 61 is opened in the distribution side long-term mode, and after the process of step S1107 is executed, the distribution side short-term mode The sorting inlet 61 is opened.

Thereafter, a distribution open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1109). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the distribution open command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S616 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the distribution open command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S617). In the control table, data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 after the distribution opening period has passed in the distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes the corresponding light emitting effect after the distribution opening period in the distribution execution mode has passed, and the speaker unit 74 performs distribution in the distribution execution mode. After the opening period has passed, the corresponding sound output effect is executed. It should be noted that these light emission effects and sound output effects are different between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Also, a distribution release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S618). When the display side MPU 113 receives the distribution open command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), it reads the display pattern table for continuing the reach fluctuation display in the distribution execution mode. . As a result, in the pattern display device 44, the variable display of the symbols is continued in the third variable display area 133 in the state where the combination of the ready-to-win symbols that were stop-displayed when the effect for the game cycle was completed is stopped. . In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed at, as already described. Also, on the symbol display device 44, an image is displayed to allow the player to recognize the current execution target of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the sorting entrance 61 is in an open state.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1110). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution start processing is executed is "4", the value of the special special electric counter is "4" corresponding to the distribution processing (step S310) by adding 1. 5”.

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution processing executed in step S310 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the sorting process, first, the sorting display section 42c is updated (step S1201). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

In the sorting process, on the condition that it is time to switch the switching piece 66 of the sorting winning device 36 from the retracted position to the V-leading position (step S1202: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 "1" is set (step S1203). As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started to switch the switching piece 66 to the V-lead position. As already explained, the timing of switching the switching piece 66 to the V-leading position is the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started in the distribution execution mode.

In the sorting process, on the condition that it is time to return the switching piece 66 of the sorting prize winning device 36 from the V guidance position to the retracted position (step S1204: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main side MPU 92 is cleared to "0" (step S1205). As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is stopped so as to switch the switching piece 66 to the retracted position. The timing for returning the switching piece 66 to the retracted position is, as already explained, the timing when the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after switching the switching piece 66 to the V-lead position.

In the distribution process, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 (step S1206: YES), the V winning flag provided in the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". ” is set (step S1207). The V winning flag is a flag for the main side MPU 92 to specify that the V winning detection sensor 69 has detected a game ball. When a game ball is detected in the state in which "1" is set, the state is maintained.

After that, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1208). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the V prize command from the main side MPU 92, it makes an affirmative determination in step S619 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and downloads the control table corresponding to the V prize command from the sound and light side ROM 104. It is read out to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S620). In the control table, data for light emission control of the display light emitting section 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker section 74 after the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize is executed in the display light emitting part 73 and the sound output effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize is executed in the speaker part 74 .

Also, a V winning command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S621). When the display side MPU 113 receives the V winning command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the V winning detection sensor 69 notifies that the game ball has been detected. Read out the display pattern table of In this case, as the display pattern tables, a first display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a V prize in the first distribution execution mode and a second display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of a V prize in the second distribution execution mode. A display pattern table is provided. When the first display pattern table is read out, as shown in FIG. 9(D), the same symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols in the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 are displayed. The display of the symbol display device 44 is controlled so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area 133 . In addition, an image notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the pattern display device 44 separately from the patterns in the respective variable display areas 131-133.

On the other hand, when the second display pattern table is read out, as shown in FIG. are different symbols and are not included in the symbols to be displayed when the variation display of the symbols is performed in the third variation display region 133. Device 44 is display controlled. Also, an image notifying that a V prize has been won is displayed on the pattern display device 44 separately from the patterns in the respective variable display areas 131-133.

In the sorting process, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not it is during the sorting closed period. The distribution closed period is a period from the end of the first opening of the distribution entrance 61 to the start of the second opening of the distribution entrance 61 in the second distribution execution mode. If it is not during the distribution closed period (step S1209: NO), the distribution open period set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (first distribution open period, second distribution open period, and third distribution open period ) has elapsed (step S1213). When the distribution open period has passed, a closing setting process for distribution is executed (step S1214). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the distribution entrance drive unit 63 in the main MPU 92 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the sorting entrance is stopped so as to switch the sorting entrance 61 to the closed state. . After that, the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC of the main RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1215). A sorting closing period (specifically, 6 sec) is set in the timer counter of the side RAM 94 (step S1217). As a result, the measurement of the distribution closing period is started.

If the distribution closed period has been set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1209. Then, when the distribution closed period has passed (step S1210: YES), the third distribution open period (specifically, 15 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1211). Then, open setting processing for distribution is executed (step S1212). In the open setting process, "1" is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance drive unit 63 in the main MPU 92 . As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution entrance is started to switch the distribution entrance 61 to the open state. . In this case, the sorting inlet 61 is in an open state in the sorting-side intermediate period mode.

As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC of the main-side RAM 94 in step S1215, if the value of the opening/closing number counter SOC becomes "0" (step S1216: NO), the distribution end processing of step S1222 is executed. Execute. Also, when it is determined that the distribution open period has not passed in step S1213, it is determined that the game ball is detected by either the count detection sensor 68 or the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. As a condition (step S1218: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter PC in the main RAM 94 (step S1219), and under the condition that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" (step S1220: YES), step Similar to S1214, a closing setting process for distribution is executed (step S1221). After that, in step S1222, distribution end processing is executed.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the sorting end process in step S1222. If the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1301: NO), stop result setting processing when V winning does not occur is executed (step S1302). In the stop result setting process, the information on the pattern stop mode of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the V winning detection sensor 69 not detecting the game ball is read. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V winning has not occurred in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. The state of the pattern stopped and displayed in the distribution display section 42c is until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started regardless of whether it is the execution period of the game cycle and whether it is in the open/close execution mode. maintained. In addition, without being limited to this, when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the distribution display section 42c It may be configured to be erased. In this case, nothing may be displayed on the distribution display section 42c, or a configuration may be adopted in which the display indicating the non-fluctuation is continued.

Thereafter, game state transition processing is executed (step S1303). In the game state transition processing, if the winning result that triggered the distribution execution mode this time is a low probability winning result, the win/loss lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. do. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the win result that triggered the distribution execution mode this time is a high-probability win result, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the result of the win/fail determination process becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the sorting-through prize-winning section 35 shifts accordingly.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1304). In the flag clearing process, the various flags used in the game round that triggered the current distribution execution mode and the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode are cleared to "0". Moreover, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1305). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure variation start process (step S305).

On the other hand, if the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), a stop result setting process when the V winning occurs is executed (step S1306). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read. This pattern stop mode information is information on a stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when V winning does not occur in step S1302. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. Further, in step S1306, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode, and when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, vibration The patterns are stopped in a different manner when the variable display of the patterns on the minute display portion 42c ends. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the distribution display section 42c which distribution execution mode the opening/closing execution mode that will occur thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. . In addition, as already described, the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed in the sorting display unit 42c is maintained until the next variable display of the pattern in the sorting display unit 42c is started. continues to be displayed. As a result, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing during the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which distribution execution mode the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It is possible to confirm.

After that, the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 is set with the information of the special electric opening period (for example, 3 sec) (step S1307). As a result, the measurement of the opening period for the special electric is started. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1". Determine which of the execution modes it is. If the mode is the first distribution execution mode (step S1308: YES), the first opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1309). If it is the second distribution execution mode (step S1308: NO), the second opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1310).

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the first opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S622 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the first opening command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S623). In the control table, light emission control data for the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data for the speaker unit 74 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the first distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered is executed. Also, the first opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S624). When the display side MPU 113 receives the first opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is performed. Read out the display pattern table for executing As a result, a display effect corresponding to the open/close execution mode triggered by the first allocation execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44 . The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the second opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S625 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the second opening command to the sound and light side. It is read from the ROM 104 to the sound and light side RAM 105 (step S626). In the control table, light emission control data for the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data for the speaker unit 74 in the open/close execution mode triggered by the second allocation execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 73, and the second distribution execution mode is executed in the speaker unit 74. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered is executed. Also, the second opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S627). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is performed. Read the display pattern table for executing As a result, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second allocation execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44 . The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

When the process of step S1309 or step S1310 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1311). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the sorting process is executed is "5", the value of the special special electric counter is "6" corresponding to the special electric start processing (step S311) by adding 1. becomes.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing executed in step S311 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special electric start process, when the special electric opening period has passed (step S1401: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "15" (step S1402), and the winning prize of the main RAM 94 is set. Set the counter PC to "10". The round counter RC is a counter for the main side MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the winning counter PC is a counter for the main side MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of the maximum number of prizes that can be won by the special electric winning device 37 in each round.

After that, the special electric open period of the round game (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1404). Then, a special electric open setting process is executed (step S1405). In the open setting process, "1" is set to the register corresponding to the drive unit 37c for the special electric in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 37c for special electric power is started to switch the big winning opening 37a to the open state.

After that, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1406). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the open command from the main side MPU 92, it transmits the open command to the display side MPU 113 in other processes of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the opening command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening of the big winning opening 37a. Read the display pattern table. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the fact that the big winning opening 37a is being opened in the symbol display device 44 is executed.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1407). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "6", the value of the special electric electric counter is "7" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S312) by adding 1. becomes.

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the processing during opening of the special electric power which is executed in step S312 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the tokuden open period has not elapsed (step S1501: NO), on the condition that a prize to the tokuden winning device 37 has occurred (step S1502: YES), the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 (step S1503). Then, if the value of the winning counter PC after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1504: YES), the value of the round counter RC is subtracted by 1 (step S1505). Also, when the special electric release period has passed (step S1501: YES), the value of the round counter RC is subtracted by 1 (step S1505).

After that, it is determined whether or not the first allocation execution flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the current open/close execution mode is triggered by the first allocation execution mode. (Step S1506). If the first distribution execution flag is set to "1" (step S1506: YES), the first special electric closing period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1507), and the first distribution execution flag If "1" is not set (step S1506: NO), the second special electric closing period is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1508).

The second special electric closing period is set longer than the first special electric closing period, as already explained, and is set longer than the special electric open period. Specifically, the first special electric closing period is set to 2 seconds, while the second special electric closing period is set to 60 seconds, which is more than twice as long as the special electric open period. Also, the setting of the second special electric closing period is always performed between round games in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the ball in the first distribution execution mode. As compared with the case where the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the detection of the game ball, the minimum time required for the end is longer.

When the process of step S1507 or step S1508 is executed, the closing setting process for the special train is executed (step S1509). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the drive unit 37c for the special electric in the main side MPU 92 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 37c for the special electric power is stopped so as to switch the big winning opening 37a to the closed state.

After that, a closing command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1510). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the close command from the main side MPU 92, it transmits the close command to the display side MPU 113 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the closing command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the closing of the big winning opening 37a. Read the display pattern table. As a result, the symbol display device 44 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the big winning opening 37a is being closed.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1511). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "7", the value of the special electric electric counter is "8" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S313) by adding 1. becomes.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step S313 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" (step S1601: NO), confirming whether the value of the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 is "0", the special electric closing period (first special electric closing period It is determined whether or not the period or the second special electric closing period) has passed (step S1602). If the special electric power closing period has passed (step S1602: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter PC of the main side RAM 94 (step S1603), and the special electric power opening period (specifically 29 sec) of the round game is set. It is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 94 (step S1604). After that, as in step S1405 in the special electric start processing (FIG. 25), the special electric open setting processing is executed (step S1605), and similarly to step S1406 in the special electric electric start processing (FIG. 25), the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1606). Then, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1607). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "8", the value of the special electric electric counter becomes "7" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S312) by subtracting 1. ”.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is "0" (step S1601: YES), an ending command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1608). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the ending command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 downloads the control table corresponding to the ending command from the sound and light side ROM 104 in other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). Read out to the side RAM 105 . Data for light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and data for sound output control of the speaker unit 74 in the ending period are set in the control table. By referring to the control table, the light emission effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the display light emitting part 73 and the sound output effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the speaker part 74 . Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits an ending command to the display side MPU 113 . When the display side MPU 113 receives the ending command from the sound and light side MPU 103, at step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display pattern table for executing the display effect corresponding to the ending period is read. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the ending period is executed on the symbol display device 44 .

After that, information of the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1609). Thereby, the measurement of the ending period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1610). Since the value of the special electric counter when the special electric closing process is executed is "8", the value of the special electric electric counter is "9" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step S314) by adding 1. becomes.

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step S314 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special electric ending process, if the ending period has passed (step S1701: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S1702). In the game state transition processing, if the winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low-probability winning result, the winning/failure lottery mode is set to a low-probability mode and the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. . However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the win result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a high-probability win result, a state is set in which the win/fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the result of the winning/failure determination process becomes a winning result and the prize-winning valid period of the through-winning section 35 for sorting is entered accordingly.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S1703). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the game round that triggered the execution of this distribution execution mode, various flags used in this distribution execution mode, and various flags used in this opening and closing execution mode Clear the flag to "0". In addition, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1704). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

<How the game progresses>
Next, how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 29(a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIG. 29(b) shows the timing when the winning to the distribution through prize winning section 35 occurs, and FIG. 29(c) shows the execution period of the distribution execution mode. , FIG. 29(d) shows the timing when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, FIG. 29(e) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIG. f) shows the period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display section 42a, FIG. h) indicates a period during which the game cycle effect is executed on the pattern display device 44 and a period during which the reach variation display is not executed, and FIG. FIG. 29(j) shows a period during which a combination of three identical symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44. FIG.

First, a case in which the result of the success/failure determination is an outlier will be described.

At the timing of t1, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 29(a), and as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, the variable display period of the game cycle has passed, and as shown in FIG. As shown, the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is terminated, and the current game round is terminated as shown in FIG. 29(a). In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the result of the success/failure determination process is out and the pattern corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. Further, in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, a symbol combination different from the ready-to-win symbol combination and the same symbol combination is stop-displayed.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the hit result is determined in the win/fail determination process, and the shift to the distribution execution mode does not occur.

At the timing of t3, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 29(a), and as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t4, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29(f), the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is ended. In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 29(h) and 29(i), in the pattern display device 44, the first variable display region 131 Then, in the second variable display area 132, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is stopped and displayed, and in the third variable display area 133, the variable display of the symbols is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has started, the player can clearly recognize that the valid prize winning period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 has started.

Also, at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the game cycle ends, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern is being performed in the distribution display part 42c in the situation where the variable reach is displayed on the pattern display device 44, and the variation of the reach is confirmed. It becomes possible to grasp whether the display is legitimate or not.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a prize is awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, and the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(c). It should be noted that even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(d), while the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 does not detect the game ball, the distribution execution mode starts at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 29(c). finish. In this case, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 29(g), the variable display of the pattern in the sorting display section 42c ends. When the variable display is terminated, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when no V winning occurs is displayed in the sorting display section 42c. Also, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 29(i), the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated. When the variable display is terminated, symbols different from the symbols forming the combination of the ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed in the third variable display area 133 of the symbol display device 44 . As a result, the player is notified that the open/close execution mode will not occur after the distribution execution mode.

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the hit result is determined in the winning/failure determination process, and the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode, and then shifts to the opening/closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode ends.

At the timing of t7, the game round is started as shown in FIG. 29(a), and as shown in FIG. As shown in 29(h), the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is started. After that, at the timing of t8, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29(f), the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, in the special figure display section 42a, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process (low probability hit result or high probability hit result) is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 29(h) and 29(i), in the pattern display device 44, the first variable display region 131 Then, in the second variable display area 132, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is stopped and displayed, and in the third variable display area 133, the variable display of the symbols is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has started, the player can clearly recognize that the valid prize winning period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 has started.

Also, at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the game cycle ends, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display part 42c in the situation where the variable display of the reach is performed in the pattern display device 44, thereby the variation of the reach. It becomes possible to grasp whether the display is legitimate or not.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 29(b), a prize is awarded to the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, and the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(c). It should be noted that even when the distribution execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

After that, at the timing of t10, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. 29(d). In this case, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 29(i) and 29(j), in the third variable display area 133 of the pattern display device 44, the same pattern as the pattern forming the ready-to-win pattern combination is displayed. appears stopped. As a result, the symbol display device 44 stops displaying the same combination of symbols in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 . Even if a V win occurs, the allocation execution mode is continued as shown in FIG. be.

After that, at the timing of t11, the distribution execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 29(c). In this case, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 29(g), the variable display of the pattern in the sorting display section 42c ends. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V prize is generated is stopped and displayed in the distribution display section 42c. Then, at the timing of t11, the opening/closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29(e).

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the distribution execution mode is entered, even if a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur unless the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. - 特許庁Thus, in the distribution execution mode, the player not only sees the game ball entering the distribution winning device 36, but also the game ball entering the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. It is expected that Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. A first distribution execution mode and a second distribution execution mode are set as distribution execution modes. can occur, in the second allocation execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball. As a result, the player expects that the first distribution execution mode will be executed. Therefore, the number of objects expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the first distribution execution mode is not selected in the distribution determination process, the second distribution execution mode is executed. As a result, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 and the distribution determination process is executed, the distribution execution mode is executed regardless of the result of the distribution determination process. The Rukoto. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the distribution execution mode to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 37 is opened/closed occurs. As a result, with the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 as a trigger, the game ball is entered into the distribution winning device 36 in the open state, and the special electric winning in the open state The situation shifts to the state in which the game ball is entered into the device 37, and the state in which the game ball is entered into the device in the open state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long game execution period in which a game ball is entered into the device in the open state.

In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 37 is in the open state, so that the target to generate the winning ball changes according to each mode. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the difference between each mode in a configuration in which a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into a device that is in an open state in either the distribution execution mode or the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

In either of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, when game balls enter the distribution winning device 36, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. As a result, even when the second distribution execution mode occurs, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

In either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode, the total period in which the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state is determined by the distribution winning device 36 in relation to the firing cycle of the game ball. It is set to a period that allows the entry of game balls of the upper limit number on the minute side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage due to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

Even if a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur. There is a high possibility that a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode due to fraud. In this case, by preventing the opening and closing execution mode from occurring , it is possible to prevent profits from being given to such fraudulent acts.

A distribution execution mode is generated by entering a game ball into the distribution through winning section 35. - 特許庁That is, in order to generate the opening and closing execution mode, the distribution execution mode is started by first entering the game ball into the distribution through prize winning section 35, and in the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is activated. It is necessary to enter a game ball to generate a V prize. As a result, the target to which the game ball is aimed is changed step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35, a transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the winning valid period occurs. Even if a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during a period different from the above, the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which the distribution execution mode is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the distribution through winning section 35 .

Different notifications are executed in the symbol display device 44 depending on whether the V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode or the V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. Similarly, when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, different notifications are executed in the distribution display section 42c. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp in which distribution execution mode the V winning occurred.

When the winning/failure determination process is executed, the variable display of the symbols is started in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, and when the winning valid period of the sorting through winning section 35 occurs, the first The reach variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. This is continued even in the valid prize winning period and the distribution execution mode. Then, when a V win occurs in the distribution execution mode, the ready-to-win fluctuation display in the third variable display area 133 is stopped in a state where the same symbols forming the combination of ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, When the distribution execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped so that the combination of the same symbols is not displayed. As a result, not only is the fact that the game round is being executed and the result of the winning/failure determination process is notified by using the variable display of the symbols in the respective variable display areas 131 to 133, but also the winning of the through prize winning section 35 for sorting is notified. The validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode are notified. Therefore, it is possible to inform various information by using the variable display of the patterns in the variable display areas 131 to 133 .

During the execution of the game cycle, the special figure display part 42a performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the variable display of the pattern is finished, the pattern corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process is stopped and displayed. In addition, during the winning effective period of the sorting through prize winning section 35 and in the sorting execution mode, the sorting display section 42c performs the variable display of the pattern, and when the variable display of the pattern ends, the A pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of occurrence of V winning is stopped and displayed. As a result, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed in the game rounds in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, in the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and in the distribution execution mode, special symbol display is performed. By checking the part 42a and the distribution display part 42c, it is possible to individually monitor each period.

When the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started, the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started. As a result, the administrator of the game hall or the like confirms whether or not the variable display of the pattern has started in the distribution display section 42c, thereby determining whether or not the valid prize winning period of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution has started. It becomes possible to grasp clearly.

The variable display of the pattern in the special figure display section 42a is ended before the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is started. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can grasp whether or not the prize winning validity period of the through prize winning portion 35 for sorting generated afterward is regular by confirming the special figure display portion 42a. becomes.

Both the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c are directly controlled by the main side MPU92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the contents displayed on the special figure display section 42a and the distribution display section 42c.

In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the special electric closing period between rounds is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Then, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting section 73 and the speaker section 74, informs to that effect. As a result, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall aware of the fact during the opening/closing execution mode, and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with it. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to reduce the utilization rate of the opening/closing execution mode, and the unit time due to the fraudulent act can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of profit obtained per hit.

Also, the period during which the special electric prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation where the game ball is being shot, etc., by lengthening the closed period, opening and closing triggered by the second distribution execution mode It is possible to reliably extend the execution mode for a long time.

In addition, only the ending period is lengthened to extend the opening and closing execution mode, but the special electric closing period before the last round game is extended to lengthen the opening and closing execution mode. is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by a fraudulent act, the fraudulent act is dealt with at a stage before the payout of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to

In addition, the upper limit number of each round game and the special electric open period are the same in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode, in contrast to the case where the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode as a result of regular play rather than by cheating. It is possible to make the payout of game balls equivalent to .

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a winning result, the sorting execution mode of the type corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination process or the type determination process is not executed, but the sorting is executed after the game round is completed. A type of distribution execution mode corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process executed when a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the through winning section 35 for distribution is executed. be. As a result, the player can perform the shooting operation while expecting that the kind of the sorting execution mode will be advantageous to the player during the valid prize winning period in which the occurrence of the sorting execution mode is confirmed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Since the distribution determination process is executed based on the game ball entering the distribution through winning section 35, it is possible to clarify the execution timing of the distribution determination process. Further, when a game ball enters the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period, not only the distribution determination process is executed but also the distribution execution mode is started. As a result, it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game content compared to a configuration in which each trigger is different.

In the sorting execution mode, the sorting display section 42c performs a variable display of patterns, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the sorting execution mode is being executed by checking the sorting display section 42c. becomes. In addition, in a configuration in which a transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs and a case in which the transition to the opening and closing execution mode does not occur depending on whether or not V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, in the distribution execution mode The stop result of the distribution display section 42c changes depending on whether or not the V winning has occurred. As a result, the distribution display section 42c is not only used as a display section for notifying that the distribution execution mode is being executed, but also as a display for notifying whether or not V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. It is possible to function as a part.

The content of the stop result when the variable display of the pattern in the sorting display section 42c ends corresponds to the presence or absence of the V winning in the sorting execution mode. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not a V win has occurred in the distribution execution mode by checking the stop result when the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not a V prize has been generated based on the contents of the distribution display section 42c easy to understand.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the distribution execution mode is executed. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 30 is a time chart showing the operation mode of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. FIGS. 30(a1) and 30(a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIGS. 30(b1) and 30(b2) show the distribution open period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 30(c2) show the period during which the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is arranged at the V-leading position.

First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 30(A). At the timing of t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30(a1), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30(b1). In this case, the distribution-side long-term opening is performed.

After that, at timing t2, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started, the switching piece 66 is V-guided from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c1). position. After that, at timing t3, the V-lead continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has passed from timing t2, and the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-lead position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c1).

In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution entrance 61 by the distribution side long-term mode is executed first, and the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. The timing is such that the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 is guaranteed to be the upper limit number on the distribution side even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning the prize to the distribution winning device 36 from before the start of the first distribution execution mode. It is the timing when it does not reach Therefore, if the shooting operation is continued with the aim of winning a prize in the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls that have entered the distribution entrance 61 will win a prize in the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is surely guided to the path area 65c and detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. - 特許庁When the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the open/close execution mode is started after the first allocation execution mode is finished.

After that, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. At the subsequent timing t5, the sorting entrance 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30(b1). In this case, release is performed in the sorting-side short-term mode.

After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side short term mode elapses at the timing of t6, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30(b1), and as shown in FIG. , the first distribution execution mode ends. If the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number before the distribution open period elapses, the distribution entrance 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t6, and the first Distributed execution mode ends. For example, when the number of winning prizes to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit number at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, the first distribution execution mode ends at that time, and the distribution side short term mode The re-opening of the sorting inlet 61 due to does not occur. However, even in this case, as already explained, the first distribution execution mode ends after the game ball is guided to the V winning path area 65c.

Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 30(B). At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30(a2), and opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30(b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the number of opening times of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution side short-term mode. The distribution opening period in the distribution side short-term mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened to when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 30(b2) and 30(c2), at timing t12, which is timing prior to timing t13, which is timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position, the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Closed. However, even if the distribution entrance 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is continued without ending.

After that, at timing t13, which is the situation in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution inlet 61 continues to be closed, a predetermined After a lapse of time (for example, 3 seconds), the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V-guided position as shown in FIG. 30(c2). After that, at timing t14 in which the second distribution execution mode continues and the distribution entrance 61 continues to be closed, a V-induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 30(c2).

In this case, in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode, so no winning to the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Also, even if a prize is awarded to the distribution winning device 36, the game ball that enters the distribution winning device 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first open round ends is branched in the distribution winning device 36. The longest period required for the path 65 to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c is the period from the end of the first opening turn to the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guidance position. shorter than (timing of t12 to timing of t13). Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 even if the shooting operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode. is low. Since the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening/closing execution mode is not started after the second apportionment execution mode ends.

At the timing t15, which is the timing after the timing t14 at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V-guiding position to the retracted position, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30(b2). . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 also correspond to the distribution side short-term mode. After that, when the distribution open period corresponding to the distribution side short-term mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution entrance 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30(b2) and shown in FIG. Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends.

As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming for winning to the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, and the second The open/close execution mode occurs after the end of the one-distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second distribution execution mode, even if a game ball aimed at winning a prize to the distribution prize winning device 36 is normally launched, detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. Therefore, the open/close execution mode does not occur after the second distribution execution mode ends. As a result, the player expects that the first allocation execution mode will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the first distribution execution mode, game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number on the distribution side to the distribution winning device 36 can win prizes, whereas in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 Winning of game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number on the distribution side cannot be expected. Furthermore, in the second distribution execution mode, there is a high possibility that the distribution winning device 36 will not win a prize. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the first distribution execution mode over the second distribution execution mode.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the distribution standby process executed by the main MPU 92 . The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the distribution standby process, if a prize has been won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S1801: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1802). Then, using the numerical information stored in the allocation execution area 125, allocation determination processing is executed (step S1803). In the distribution determination process, the distribution table is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches with any of

Thereafter, the display table for the distribution display section 42c is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1804). In the display table for the distribution display section 42c, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set. That is, the display table contains data for specifying the display contents of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode, and the display contents of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. data for specifying the is set. For example, when the distribution display unit 42c is a so-called 7-segment display, data for displaying "1" on the distribution display unit 42c as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is set, and data for displaying "2" on the distribution display section 42c as the display content of the distribution display section 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is set.

Thereafter, the data corresponding to the result of the current distribution determination process is identified from the display table for the distribution display section 42c, and the identified data is set as data for display control of the distribution display section 42c (step S1805). ). As a result, the result of the distribution determination process is displayed on the distribution display section 42c. That is, in the present embodiment, when the distribution determination process is executed, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed in the distribution display section 42c, and the pattern changes in the distribution display section 42c. No display is performed. By displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display section 42c in this way, when the distribution execution mode is started, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to notify which of the minute execution modes is supported by the distribution display section 42c.

In addition, when the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode that does not involve the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. is terminated when the distribution execution mode is terminated, and is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. As a result, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode can be either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. In addition, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the opening and closing execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

Instead of the configuration in which the display on the distribution display section 42c is erased at the end of the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode or at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. It may be configured to be deleted at the end of the distribution execution mode regardless of whether or not it is, or may be configured to be deleted when a new game round is started. In addition, the distribution display unit 42c continues to display the pattern corresponding to the result of the previous distribution determination process, and displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process when the distribution determination process is executed. A configuration in which the contents can be changed is also possible.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution mode has been selected in the distribution determination processing in step S1803 (step S1806). If the first distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: YES), the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1807). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode by the main side MPU 92, If the value of the first distribution execution flag is "1", specify that the first distribution execution mode should be executed, and if the value of the first distribution execution flag is "0", specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. After that, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1808). The processing contents of the sound and light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the first distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if the second distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S1809). The processing contents of the sound and light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the second distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the process of step S1808 or step S1809 is executed, the information of the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1810). As a result, the measurement of the distribution opening period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the distribution standby processing is executed is "3", the value of the special special electric counter corresponds to the distribution start processing (step S309) by adding 1. It becomes "4".

Note that in the present embodiment, processing for updating the display contents in the distribution display section 42c is not executed in the distribution start processing (FIG. 22) and the distribution processing (FIG. 23).

As described above, when the distribution determination process is executed, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display section 42c. By displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display section 42c in this way, when the distribution execution mode is started, the distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to notify which of the minute execution modes is supported by the distribution display section 42c.

The display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c when the distribution execution mode is started is the distribution execution mode that does not involve the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It is terminated when the distribution execution mode ends, and when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated when the opening/closing execution mode occurs. As a result, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode can be either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. In addition, by checking the distribution display section 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the opening and closing execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

The distribution display unit 42c is directly controlled by the main MPU92. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the information displayed on the distribution display section 42c.

A special figure display part 42a is provided separately from the distribution display part 42c, and the variation display of the pattern during the game is performed in the special figure display part 42a. As a result, the display unit for notifying that the game round is being executed and the result of the success/failure determination process, and the display unit for notifying the result of the distribution determination process, the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution It is provided separately as the display section 42c. Therefore, by checking the special figure display section 42a and the distribution display section 42c, it is possible to monitor each content individually.

In the present embodiment, when the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 is started, the variable display of the pattern is started in the distribution display section 42c, and the winning to the distribution through winning section 35 is started. It may be configured such that when the distribution determination process is executed and the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is terminated. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the prize winning period for the sorting through prize winning section 35 is valid by confirming whether or not the variable display of the pattern is being executed in the distribution display section 42c. becomes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a display unit directly controlled by the main side MPU 92 is provided separately from the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c, and in the distribution execution mode, the display unit displays the fluctuation of the pattern. may be configured to perform In this case, in the display unit, similarly to the distribution display unit 42c in the first embodiment, depending on whether or not the V prize has occurred in the distribution execution mode, when ending the variable display of the pattern A configuration may be adopted in which the types of patterns to be stopped are varied.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is reliably performed. In the present embodiment, even if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize winning effective period, the transition to the distribution execution mode may not occur. In addition, when a prize is won in the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, the probability of transitioning to the distribution execution mode and winning varies depending on the game state. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the types of winning results in this embodiment will be described. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being a winning result in the win/fail determination process (step S403) in the main side MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. A plurality of types of winning results are common in that they serve as triggers for starting the valid winning period of the through prize winning section 35 for sorting, but there is a combination of the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process and the winning probability in the sorting judgment process. It becomes an opportunity to change the type to a mutually different type. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, the selected winning result will be handled as long as the game cycle in which the type determination process is executed does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

A type table 93a is provided in the main-side ROM 93 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 32(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table 93a. In the type table 93a, there are a low probability winning result, a first high probability winning result, a second high probability winning result, a third high probability winning result, and a fourth high probability winning result, as allocation destinations of the winning results for the type counter C2. There is a high probability result and a fifth high probability result. Specifically, in the type table 93a, of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability hit result, "10 to 13" is the first high probability hit result , "14-17" corresponds to the second high probability result, "18-21" corresponds to the third high probability result, "22-25" is the fourth It corresponds to the high probability hit result, and "26 to 29" corresponds to the fifth high probability hit result.

Corresponding to each of these winning results, as shown in FIG. A third high-precision table group 93e, a fourth high-precision table group 93f, and a fifth high-precision table group 93g are provided. If one of the hit results is selected in the type determination process in a predetermined game round, and a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs with the predetermined game round as a trigger, the type determination is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends. A game state corresponding to the winning result selected in the process is set. Then, when a game round is performed in that game state, the win/fail determination process is executed using the win/fail tables included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the game state, and the game round is followed by shaking. When the valid prize winning period of the divided through prize winning section 35 occurs, distribution determination processing is executed using the distribution tables included in the table group 93b to 93g corresponding to the game state. In addition, the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1, which is the winning result in the winning/failing determination process, is set in the winning/failing table. In addition, in the distribution table, the numerical range of the distribution counter C3 that becomes the winning result in the distribution determination process is set, and the numerical range that becomes the winning result is the execution winning of the first distribution execution mode. A numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 and a numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 for winning the execution of the second distribution execution mode are set.

FIG. 32(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to each winning result. When the winning result is a low certainty, the winning probability in the win/fail determination process is 1/40, and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is 1/5. In this case, the combination probability of winning results in the winning/failure determination process and winning any of the distribution execution modes in the distribution determination process is 1/200. When the first high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process becomes 1/4 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is the same as that of the low probability result. It will be the same 1/5, and the combined probability will be 1/20, which is higher than for the low probability outcome. In the case of the second high probability result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/8 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 2/5, and the combined probability is 1/20, which is the same as in the case of the first high probability winning result. When the third high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/10 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. 2/5, and the combined probability is 1/25, which is lower than the first and second high-probability outcomes and higher than the low-probability outcomes. When the fourth high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/20 higher than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 4/5, and the combined probability is 1/25, which is the same as in the case of the third high-probability result. In the case of the fifth high probability result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is the same as the case of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result. is also high 1/1 (ie 100%), and the combined probability is 1/40, which is lower than for the first to fourth high-probability outcomes and higher than for the low-probability outcomes.

If the hit/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to one of the high probability hit results as described above, the hit/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to the low probability hit result. The combination probability is higher than when executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high-probability result.

Depending on the type of high certainty winning result, the type of combination of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the sorting determination process, and accordingly it is possible to diversify the games.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/20 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

There is a high probability result in which the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is lower than other high probability results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the other high probability results. There is a high certainty result in which the winning probability of the determination process is higher than the other high certainty results, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is lower than the other high certainty results. As a result, it is possible to separately generate a situation in which the probability of winning in the win-or-fail judgment process and a situation in which the probability of winning in the sorting judgment process increases, and to diversify the targets for which the degree of advantage increases. Become.

Depending on the type of the high probability result, one of the winning probability of the winning judgment process and the winning probability of the sorting judgment process is higher than the low probability result, and the other is the same as the low probability result. situation arises. As a result, while one of the right or wrong determination process and the distribution determination process is extremely advantageous than the case of the low probability hit result, the other is possible to make the advantage the same as the case of the low probability hit result. , it is possible to sharpen the success/failure determination process and the allocation determination process.

The winning probability of the fifth high probability winning result is the same as that of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is assured. will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning result is obtained in the winning judgment process, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process regardless of which table group 93b to 93g is selected is 1/1 of the winning result in the distribution determination process. 2 is constant.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the execution of the win/fail determination process and the allocation determination process corresponding to the hit results as described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process in this embodiment. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed in step S305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of reservation information on the special figure side is one or more (step S1901: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S1902). In the data setting process, the same process as the data setting process (step S402) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, the success/failure table corresponding to the current game state is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1903). Specifically, the main RAM 94 stores a first high-precision state flag, a second high-probability state flag, a third high-probability state flag, a fourth high-probability state flag, and a A status flag and a fifth high probability status flag are provided. The state in which "1" is set in the first high-probability state flag means that it is a game state after the first high-probability hit result and the opening and closing execution mode occur after that, and the second high-probability state flag is set to "1". The state in which "1" is set means that it is a game state after the second high probability win result and the open/close execution mode is generated after that, and "1" is set to the third high probability state flag. It means that it is a game state after the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the third high probability hit result, and the state where "1" is set to the fourth high probability state flag is the fourth high probability. It means that it is a game state after the win result is obtained and the opening and closing execution mode is generated after that, and the state where the fifth high probability state flag is set to "1" becomes the fifth high probability winning result and then opening and closing execution. It means that it is a game state after the mode has occurred, and the state where "1" is not set to all high probability state flags will result in a low probability hit result, and then in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode has occurred. It means that there is

In step S1903, the states of the first to fifth high-probability state flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and the right/fail table is read out of the table groups 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93 corresponding to the specified results. After that, read out the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 in the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is set as the hit result in the read success table It is determined whether or not it matches with any of them (step S1904).

If the result of this win/fail determination process is a hit result (step S1905: YES), the type table 93a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1906). Since only one type of type table 93a is provided, the one type of type table 93a is read. After that, read out the numerical information obtained from the type counter C2 in the pending information stored in the execution area 124 for special figures, the read numerical information is set in the type table 93a low probability result, the first high probability A hit result, a second high probability hit result, a third high probability hit result, a fourth high probability hit result and a fifth high probability hit result are determined (step S1907).

After executing the type determination process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 corresponding to the type of winning result specified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step S1908). Specifically, the main RAM 94 has a low probability winning flag, a first high probability winning flag, a second high probability winning flag, a third high probability winning flag, a fourth high probability winning flag, and a fifth high probability winning flag. At step S1908, only the winning flag corresponding to the result of the type determination processing among those winning flags is set to "1".

Thereafter, stop result setting processing for winning results is executed (step S1909). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for the hit result stored in advance in the main side ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94 . In this stop result table for the winning result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a is set differently for each type of winning result, and in step S1909, in step S1907 The main side RAM 94 stores the information of the pattern stop mode according to the type of the winning result specified by . The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the winning results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for winning results for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

The processing contents of steps S1910 to S1915 are the same as the processing contents of steps S408 to S413 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the distribution standby process in this embodiment. In addition, the distribution standby process is executed in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the distribution standby process, first, the distribution display section 42c is updated (step S2001). In addition, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display part 42c is started in step S905 in the process (FIG. 20) during special figure determination like the said 1st Embodiment. Further, the processing content of the update processing is the same as step S1001 of the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S2002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the through prize-winning section 35 for distribution occurs only in step S2002. As a result, the valid winning period for the distribution through winning section 35 occurs only when the game cycle corresponding to the winning result is completed.

If a prize has been awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 (step S2002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S2003). Thereafter, the states of the first to fifth high-probability flags of the main RAM 94 are specified, and the distribution table is read out from the table group 93b to 93g of the main ROM 93 corresponding to the specified result to the main RAM 94. By doing so, the distribution table corresponding to the current game state is read out (step S2004). FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining distribution tables included in the low-occupancy table group 93b and the first high-occupancy table group 93c. In the distribution table, out of the distribution counter C3 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" correspond to the result of deviation, and "24 to 26" correspond to the transition to the first distribution execution mode. , and "27 to 29" correspond to the transition to the second distribution execution mode. In this case, a winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/5, and a transition to the first distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 1/2 of the winning results, and 1/5 of the winning results. A transition to the second distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 2.

After that, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches any of the numerical information set as the winning result in the distribution table read out. In addition, in the distribution determination process of step S2005, when the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches the numerical information of the winning result, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution are executed. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information in the execution mode.

If the result of the distribution determination process is a winning result (step S2006: YES), a stop result setting process at the time of distribution winning is executed (step S2007). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the distribution display section 42c is read from the main ROM 93 . This pattern stop mode information is information on different stop modes when the first distribution execution mode occurs, when the second distribution execution mode occurs, and when none of the distribution execution modes occurs. is set. In step S2007, when the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, the pattern stop mode information corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is read and the pattern in the mode corresponding to the information is stopped. Display control is performed on the distribution display section 42c so that it is displayed, and when the second distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is read. At the same time, display control is performed on the sorting display section 42c so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed.

After that, setting processing for the distribution execution mode is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, the same processes as those of steps S1005 to S1010 of the distribution standby process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, the transition setting to the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode is performed.

After that, after reading the variation display table for the V winning determination display section from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2009), the V winning determination display section starts the variable display of the pattern (step S2010). In the present embodiment, the result of the distribution determination process is displayed in the distribution display section 42c. Therefore, the display for notifying that the distribution execution mode is on and whether or not the V prize has occurred in the distribution execution mode. As a part, a V prize judgment display part is provided separately. The V winning judgment display section is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is not possible to perform a complicated display such as that of the symbol display device 44 in the V winning judgment display section, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the V winning judgment display section. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the V winning judgment display section, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors are displayed. is displayed. The display range of the V prize determination display section is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 . As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the symbol display device 44 rather than the V winning determination display portion.

The variable display table for the V winning determination display section is a table in which the variable display pattern of the pattern to be displayed in the V winning determination display section is predetermined. The same variable display table is used when variable display of patterns is executed in the V prize determination display section. When the variable display of patterns is carried out in the V winning determination display section, the variable display of patterns according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display section, the variable display table for the V winning determination display section is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode ends. Note that in step S1101 of the distribution start processing (FIG. 22) and step S1201 of the distribution processing (FIG. 23) in the present embodiment, the updating processing of the V winning judgment display unit is performed instead of the updating processing of the distribution display unit 42c. is executed based on the above-mentioned fluctuation display table.

When the result of the distribution determination process is the result of the deviation (step S2006: NO), the stop result setting process for the result of the distribution deviation is executed (step S2011). Specifically, the pattern stop mode information corresponding to the fact that the result of the distribution determination process is an outlier is read from the main-side ROM 93 . This pattern stop mode information is the pattern stop mode information that is not selected in the stop result setting process (step S2007) at the time of distribution winning. In step S2011, the information of the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the sorting determination processing being the result of being out of line is read, and the sorting display section 42c is displayed so that the pattern in the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2012). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the current game round and the current winning valid period are cleared to "0". Also, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

Here, when the result is out in the distribution determination process, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed without shifting to the distribution execution mode, but the game state transition process is not executed. Therefore, in the case of a loss result in the distribution determination process, the transition of the game state corresponding to the winning result that occurred in the game round that triggered the transition to the winning valid period of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution this time. That is, there is no change in the combination of the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process and the winning probability in the distribution judgment process.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing sorting end processing in this embodiment. Note that the distribution end processing is executed in step S1222 in the distribution processing (FIG. 23).

In the distribution end process, when the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the stop result setting process when the V winning occurs is executed (step S2102). In the stop result setting process, the information of the stop mode of the pattern of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read. This pattern stop mode information is information on a stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when V winning does not occur in step S2108. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize in the current distribution execution mode is displayed in the V prize determination display section. Further, in step S2102, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode and when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, V There is a difference in the way the symbols are stopped when the variation display of the symbols in the prize determination display section ends. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the V winning determination display section which opening/closing execution mode that will occur thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which sorting execution mode. . In addition, since the state of the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the V winning judgment display section is maintained until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the V winning judgment display section is started, the display is continued even in the subsequent opening/closing execution mode. be. As a result, by confirming the V prize determination display section at any timing during the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which sorting execution mode the V winning occurred as a trigger for the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to confirm.

After that, in steps S2103 to S2107, the same processes as steps S1307 to S1311 of the sorting end process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), stop result setting processing when V winning does not occur is executed (step S2108). In the stop result setting process, the information of the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the fact that the V winning detection sensor 69 did not detect the game ball is read. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V prize has not been generated in the distribution execution mode of this time is displayed in the V prize determination display section. The state of the pattern stopped and displayed in the V winning judgment display section is until the next fluctuation display of the pattern in the V winning judgment display section is started regardless of the execution period of the game cycle and whether it is in the open/close execution mode. maintained. In addition, it is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode without transition to the opening/closing execution mode ends, or when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the V winning judgment display section It may be configured to be erased. In this case, nothing may be displayed in the V prize determination display section, or a configuration may be adopted in which the display indicating the non-fluctuation is continued.

Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2109). In the flag clearing process, various flags used in the current game round, the current winning valid period, and the current allocation execution mode are cleared to "0". Moreover, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

Here, when V winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode, the game state transition processing is not executed although the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed without shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, when V winning does not occur in the distribution execution mode, the transition of the game state corresponding to the winning result that occurred in the game round that triggered the transition to the distribution execution mode this time, that is, the winning/failing determination process There is no change in the combination of winning probabilities in the above and the winning probabilities in the sorting determination process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in this embodiment. The game state transition process is executed at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

In the game state transition process, when "1" is set to any one of the first high probability winning flag, second high probability winning flag, third high probability winning flag and fourth high probability winning flag of the main side RAM 94 (Step S2201: YES), among the first high-precision state flag, the second high-probability state flag, the third high-probability state flag, and the fourth high-probability state flag of the main side RAM 94, the high "1" is set to the high probability state flag corresponding to the probability winning flag (step S2202). As a result, the high-probability table group 93c to 93f corresponding to the high-probability hit result of this time will be referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. The state of the high-probability state flag set here is held until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time.

After that, the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2203). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. The state in which the first high-frequency support flag is set to "1" is maintained until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time. However, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, in the case of any one of the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35, the distribution execution mode, and the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode until just before that. Regardless of whether it was set or not, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, a state transition command corresponding to the high probability state flag set to "1" this time is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2204). When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the state transition command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 stores the control table corresponding to the current state transition command in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). to the sound and light side RAM 105. As a result, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner corresponding to the high probability winning result of this time, and sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed in a manner corresponding to the high probability winning result of this time. Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the state transition command received this time to the display side MPU 113 . When the display-side MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command at step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the pattern display device 44 based on the table.

The display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the game state in which the win/fail determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group 93d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 38(a). do. As shown in FIG. 38(a), a probability display area 151 is displayed on the pattern display device 44 in a situation where the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process are executed. In the probability display area 151, a probability corresponding image corresponding to the winning probability of the current win/fail determination process is displayed. In this case, the probability corresponding image is displayed based on the winning probability of the winning/failure determining process in the gaming state in which the winning/failure determining process and the allocation determining process are executed using the low-probability table group 93b. Specifically, when the second high probability table group 93d is referred to, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/4, and when the low likelihood table group 93b is referred to, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is It is ten times the probability of 1/40. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the second high-probability table group 93d is referred to, the probability display area 151 displays the "10 times" image as the probability corresponding image. On the other hand, the winning probability of the allocation determination process including the symbol display device 44 is not reported. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to predict the winning probability of the sorting determination process while clearly indicating the winning probability of the win/fail determination process to the player.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 37), when the fifth high probability winning flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the fifth high probability state flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2206). As a result, the fifth high-probability table group 93g is referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Also, as in step S2203, the first high-frequency support flag in the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2207). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. After that, a common transfer command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2208). Processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 103 when the common transition command is received will be described later.

In the game state transition process, when none of the first to fifth winning flags of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2205: NO), the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2209). As a result, the low-probability table group 93b is referred to in the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Also, the second high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "1", and the end reference counter provided in the main RAM 94 is set to "100" (step S2210). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, the value of the end criterion counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed, and when the value of the end criterion counter becomes "0", the second high frequency support flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when 100 games have been completed, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Thereafter, as in step S2208, a common shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2211).

When the sound and light side MPU 103 receives the common transfer command from the main side MPU 92, the sound and light side MPU 103 sets the control table corresponding to the common transfer command from the sound and light side ROM 104 in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Read out to the light-side RAM 105 . As a result, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner in which the player cannot identify which of the low-usage table group 93b and the fifth high-usage table group 93g is to be used. Sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed. Also, the sound and light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the common transfer command to the display side MPU 113 . When the display-side MPU 113 receives the command, it reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command at step S702 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the pattern display device 44 based on the table.

FIG. 38(b) shows the display contents of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the game state in which the winning/failure determination process and the allocation determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b or the fifth high probability table group 93g. Description will be made with reference to explanatory drawings. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the probability display area 151 of the pattern display device 44, a "normal" image is displayed as the probability-corresponding image. In addition, since the support mode of the induction unit 52 is set to the high frequency support mode in any of the cases where the low probability hit result and the fifth high probability result result, the operation mode of the induction unit 52 Therefore, the player cannot grasp which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. As a result, the player plays the game while predicting which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used.

In particular, when the fifth high-probability table group 93g is used, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low-probability table group 93b, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. It has become. In other words, if the hit result is obtained in the win/fail determination process, the distribution execution mode is surely generated. Then, when "normal" is displayed as the probability corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44, the player plays the game expecting that the fifth high probability table group 93g is set. It will happen.

On the other hand, when the result is a low probability hit result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the low frequency support mode when 100 game rounds are completed, while when the fifth high probability hit result is obtained. The support mode of the guidance unit 52 is kept in the high-frequency support mode even if 100 game rounds are completed. As a result, immediately after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is executed while allowing the player to predict which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. When the game cycle is repeatedly executed without transition to , it is possible for the player to recognize which table group is to be used.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process can vary, and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can vary. . This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each determination process is executed. Also, both the probability that the winning result will be selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will be selected in the distribution determination process are in a situation where the low probability table group 93b is used. may have different probabilities. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are fluctuating at the same time. It is possible to make it different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the case of this embodiment, in order for the transition to the open/close execution mode to occur, it is necessary that at least the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the transition to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process. be. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes to which the player who expects the shift to the open/close execution mode will pay attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a hit result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will affect the probability of transition to the open/close execution mode. . In this case, as described above, the low probability table group 93b is used for both the probability of winning in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. The probability may be different from the situation. This makes it possible to diversify the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode compared to a configuration in which only one of the probability of the success/failure determination process and the probability of the distribution determination process varies. In addition, even if the probability of selecting a winning result in the win/fail judgment process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process are not greatly changed, the probability of transition to the opening and closing execution mode is greatly changed. It is possible to

There are three or more types of probabilities that winning results will be selected in the success/failure determination process, and three or more probabilities that the winning result will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. As a result, it is possible to diversify the probability of a winning result in each determination process, and to diversify the combined probability of these determination processes.

If the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a manner corresponding to any of the high probability results, if the success/failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing are performed in a manner that corresponds to the low probability results The above synthesis probability is higher than This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high-probability result.

Depending on the type of high certainty hit result, the type of combination of the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability in the success/failure determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process, and thereby to diversify the games.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/20 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

There is a high probability result in which the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is lower than other high probability results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the other high probability results. There is a high certainty result in which the winning probability of the determination process is higher than the other high certainty results, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment process is lower than the other high certainty results. As a result, it is possible to separately generate a situation in which the probability of winning in the win-or-fail judgment process and a situation in which the probability of winning in the sorting judgment process increases, and to diversify the targets for which the degree of advantage increases. Become.

Depending on the type of the high probability result, one of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low probability result, and the other is the same as that of the low probability result. situation arises. As a result, while one of the correctness determination process and the distribution determination process is extremely advantageous than the case of the low probability hit result, the other is possible to make the advantage the same as the case of the low probability hit result, It is possible to give sharpness to the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process.

The winning probability of the fifth high probability winning result is the same as that of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is assured. will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning result is obtained in the winning judgment process, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed. It becomes possible.

Occurrence of a V prize can change both the probability that a winning result will be selected in the win/fail determination process and the probability that the game will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the timing at which each probability fluctuates.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process configuration for setting the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in this embodiment. The game state transition process is executed at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game round that occurred before the opening/closing execution mode this time is a high-probability hit result (step S2301: YES), probability lottery process for winning/failure determination is executed (step S2302). In addition, in this embodiment, there is only one type of high-probability winning result. In the winning probability lottery process for winning/failing determination, the winning probability of the winning/failure determining process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probabilities of the success/failure determination process that can be selected in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination.

1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, which are higher than the winning probability at the time of low probability, are set as the winning probability for selection in the success/failure determination process. The lottery probabilities of the respective selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination are all the same, and more specifically, the probability of each selection target winning probability being selected is 20%. In the probability lottery process for judging success or failure, first, the probability lottery table for judging success or failure is read from the main ROM 93 , and then numerical information is acquired from the success or failure lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 . Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the probability lottery table for winning/failing determination.

After executing the probability lottery process (step S2302) for the win/fail judgment, by setting "1" to the flag in the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability selected in the probability lottery process, the selected winning probability is set as the winning probability in the win/fail determination process (step S2303). As a result, until step S2303 is executed next time, in step S1904 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), the success/failure determination process is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the flag set to "1".

Thereafter, probability lottery processing for distribution determination is executed (step S2304). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning probabilities of distribution determination processing that can be selected in probability lottery processing of distribution determination.

1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1 are set as selection target winning probabilities of the allocation determination process. The lottery probabilities of the respective selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process for distribution determination are all the same, and specifically, the probability of each selection target winning probability being selected is 20%. In the distribution determination probability lottery process, first, the distribution determination probability lottery table is read from the main ROM 93 , and then numerical information is acquired from the distribution lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 . Then, the acquired numerical information is collated against the probability lottery table for distribution determination.

After executing the distribution determination probability lottery process (step S2304), the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process set in step S2303 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2304 is calculated. Calculate (step S2305). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2306). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, if 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, if 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the cumulative result is predetermined. value, and if 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the distribution determination process, the cumulative result will not be less than the predetermined value. Further, for example, when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, the cumulative result is predetermined regardless of which winning probability is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. value or less.

If the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2307). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the distribution determination process currently selected and is the next highest after the winning probability is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2305 and S2306 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2305 to S2307 are repeated until the synthetic probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the cumulative result is equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2306: YES), the currently selected The probability of winning is set as the probability of winning for distribution determination processing (step S2308). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2310). As a result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected this time are notified by the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44. FIG.

In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game round that occurred before the opening/closing execution mode this time is a low probability hit result (step S2301: NO), the initial probability setting process of the win/fail judgment is executed (step S2311). ). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than the winning probability of all selection targets that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. Execute the flag setting process. Also, the setting processing of the initial probability of allocation determination is executed (step S2312). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high certainty winning result. setting process.

Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the end reference counter of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". "100" is set (step S2313). As a result, the high-frequency support mode with 100 game times as the upper limit is set. Also, a low probability shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2314). As a result, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44 inform that both the win probability of the success/failure determination process and the win probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result will be selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are each determined by the individual lottery process. selected. This makes it possible to diversify the modes of combinations of probabilities.

If the combination probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability that the winning result will be transferred to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process is greater than a predetermined value, the combination probability is the predetermined value. The probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected as follows. Thereby, in the configuration in which the probability of selecting the winning result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are each selected in the individual lottery process. It is possible to keep the combined probabilities thereof within a predetermined probability range.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process configuration for setting the winning probability in the win/fail determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure determination in this embodiment. In addition, the processing during special figure determination is executed at step S307 in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 14).

If the final stop period has passed (step S2401: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a loss result (step S2402: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". (step S2403). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

When the final stop period has passed (step S2401: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S2402: YES), the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2404), the sorting display section 42c starts the variable display of the pattern (step S2405). After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S2406). Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2407). The processing contents of these steps S2404 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S904 to S907 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, the first game state transition processing is executed (step S2408). In other words, the first game state transition process is executed when the game round resulting in a winning result ends. In other words, the first game state transition process is executed regardless of the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 and the game contents of the distribution execution mode. In the first game state transition process, as will be described later, a process for changing the winning probability of the win/fail determination process is executed. By being executed irrelevantly, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process can change even if the shift to the distribution execution mode does not occur, and can change even if the shift to the open/close execution mode does not occur.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing. First, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, one of the high probability hit result and the low probability hit result is selected in the type determination processing that is executed when the hit result is obtained in the propriety determination processing. Also when a lottery result is obtained in the sorting determination process, either a high probability winning result or a low probability winning result is selected by using a lottery counter and a lottery table different from the type determination process. In other words, there are high probability hit results and low probability hit results of the success/failure determination process, and there are high probability hit results and low probability hit results of the distribution determination process.

When it is a high-probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501: YES), the probability lottery process of success/failure determination is executed (step S2502). In the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, as in step S2302 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/4, 1/5 set as the selection target winning probability of the success/failure determination process , 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20.

After that, the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process selected in step S2502 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2503). Then, it is determined whether or not the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the allocation determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the winning determination process. As follows, when 1/4, 1/5 or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability in the success/failure determination process, the cumulative result does not become less than or equal to the predetermined value.

If the synthetic probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2504: NO), the probability correction processing of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2505). In the probability correction process, the winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the winning/failure determination process currently selected and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2503 and S2504 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. If the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504: YES), the currently selected flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the win/fail judgment process is set to "1". The selected probability of winning is set as the probability of winning in the success/failure determination process (step S2506).

If it is not a high-probability hit result of the success/failure determination process (step S2501: NO), an initial probability setting process of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2507). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than the winning probability of all selection targets that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. Execute the flag setting process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the second game state transition processing. It should be noted that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

If the result is a high probability hit result of the distribution determination process (step S2601: YES), the probability lottery process of the distribution determination is executed (step S2602). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2, which are set as the selection target winning probabilities of the distribution determination process. Select one winning probability among /5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

After that, the product of the current winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected in step S2602 is calculated (step S2603). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2604). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already explained. Therefore, for example, if 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, if 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the cumulative result is a predetermined value. When 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the sorting determination process, the cumulative result does not fall below the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2604: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2605). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the currently selected winning probability of the sorting determination process and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2603 and S2604 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2603 to S2605 are repeated until the synthetic probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the synthetic probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2604: YES), by setting "1" to the flag in the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process, The winning probability currently selected is set as the winning probability of the allocation determination process (step S2606). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the first high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). As a result, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high-frequency support mode. Also, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2608). As a result, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected this time are notified by the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44. FIG.

When it is not a high probability hit result of the distribution determination process (step S2601: NO), the initial probability setting process of the distribution determination is executed (step S2609). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high certainty winning result. setting process.

Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the game state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, the second high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the end reference counter of the main side RAM 94 is set to "1". "100" is set (step S2610). As a result, the high-frequency support mode with 100 game times as the upper limit is set. Also, a low probability shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103 (step S2611). As a result, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44 inform that both the win probability of the success/failure determination process and the win probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the change in the probability that a win result is selected in the win-or-fail determination process is performed when the game round in which the hit result is selected in the win-or-fail determination process ends. It can be executed regardless of whether it is executed or not and whether V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the distribution determination process, the change of the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode can be executed when the opening/closing execution mode generated by the V prize is terminated. In other words, a situation in which the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process fluctuates, and a situation in which the probability of winning in the sorting execution mode fluctuates in the sorting process will occur separately. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

In addition, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will occur in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process or the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. As a result, a situation in which the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process fluctuates and a situation in which the probability of winning a transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process fluctuates separately. , it is possible to keep the combined probability within a predetermined probability range.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the first game state transition processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the first game state transition processing is executed in step S2408 of the processing during special figure determination (FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-probability continuation number counter provided in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S2701). In this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when the winning result is selected in the winning judgment process and the high probability winning result is selected in the type judging process, the winning probability of the winning judgment process becomes higher than the normal game state. The situation continues until the first game state transition process occurs a predetermined number of times thereafter. 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times are set as the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability result is selected by the type determination process in a situation where the number of times of continuation is one or more, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability result. The high-probability continuation number counter for right/wrong determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main MPU 92 .

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter of the success/failure determination is "0" (step S2701: YES), on the condition that the high-probability hit result is selected in the type determination processing in this game round (step S2702: YES), the number of continuation lottery process for success/failure determination is executed (step S2703). As already explained, 1 time, 2 times and 3 times are set as the number of continuations of the state in which the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination process is higher than in the normal game state. In the lottery process for the number of continuations of winning/failure determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, numerical information is acquired from the regularly updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is used. By collating against the lottery table, the number of continuations of success/failure determination is selected from 1, 2, and 3 times. Then, the number of continuations of the selected success/failure determination is set in a high-probability continuation counter of success/failure determination (step S2704).

After that, probability lottery processing for success/failure determination is executed (step S2705). In the probability lottery process of the success/failure determination, as in step S2302 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/4, 1/5 set as the selection target winning probability of the success/failure determination process , 1/8, 1/10 and 1/20. These selection target winning probabilities are higher than the winning probabilities that are set when a low certainty result is obtained.

After that, the product of the winning probability of the success/failure determination process selected in step S2705 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2706). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the allocation determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the winning determination process. When 1/4, 1/5 or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability in the success/failure determination process, the cumulative result does not fall below the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2707: NO), the probability correction processing of the success/failure determination is executed (step S2708). In the probability correction process, the winning probability that is lower than the winning probability of the winning/failure determination process currently selected and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2706 and S2707 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2706 to S2708 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. If the synthetic probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707: YES), the currently selected flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is set to "1". The winning probability that is selected is set as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process (step S2709).

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the yes/no judgment is not "0" (step S2701: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the yes/no judgment (step S2710). Then, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S2711: NO), the processing of steps S2705 to S2709 already described is executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is not fixed. The probability of winning in the determination process can fluctuate.

On the other hand, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for success/failure determination after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2711: YES), the process of setting the initial probability of success/failure determination is executed (step S2712). In the setting process, the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than the winning probability of all selection targets that can be selected in the case of a high probability winning result. Execute the flag setting process.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the second game state transition processing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process at step S1702 in the special electric end process (FIG. 28).

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-precision continuation number counter for allocation determination provided in the main RAM 94 is "0" (step S2801). In this embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when the winning result is selected in the distribution determination process and the high probability winning result is selected, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the normal game state. However, after that, the second game state transition processing continues until it occurs a predetermined number of times. 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times and 5 times are set as the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is determined by lottery. Even if a low certainty winning result is selected by the distribution judgment processing in a situation where the number of times of continuation is one or more, the winning probability of the distribution judgment processing is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low certainty winning result. The high-probability continuation number counter for allocation determination is a counter for specifying the number of continuations by the main side MPU 92 .

If the value of the high-probability continuation counter for distribution determination is "0" (step S2801: YES), on the condition that a high-probability hit result is selected in this distribution determination process (step S2802: YES ), a lottery process for the number of continuations of distribution determination is executed (step S2803). As already explained, 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, and 5 times are set as the number of continuations of the state in which the probability of winning in the distribution determination process is higher than that in the normal game state. In the continuation number lottery process for allocation determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, numerical information is acquired from the periodically updated lottery counter in the main RAM 94, and the acquired numerical information is obtained. is collated against the lottery table to select the number of continuous allocation determinations from 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 times. Then, the number of continuations of the selected allocation determination is set in the high-probability continuation number counter of the allocation determination (step S2804).

Thereafter, probability lottery processing for distribution determination is executed (step S2805). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, as in step S2304 of the game state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, 1/5, 2, which are set as the selection target winning probabilities of the distribution determination process. Select one winning probability among /5, 3/5, 4/5 and 1/1.

After that, the product of the current winning probability of the success/failure determination process and the winning probability of the sorting determination process selected in step S2805 is calculated (step S2806). Then, it is determined whether or not the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already explained. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success/failure determination process, when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the sorting determination process, the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and if 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability in the sorting determination process, the combination probability of the integration result will not be equal to or less than the predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is not equal to or less than the predetermined value (step S2807: NO), the distribution determination probability correction process is executed (step S2808). In the probability correction process, a winning probability that is lower than the currently selected winning probability of the sorting determination process and has the next highest value is set as a selection target. Then, the processes of steps S2806 and S2808 are executed again for the winning probability, and the processes of steps S2806 to S2808 are repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

If the combined probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807: YES), by setting the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process to "1", The winning probability currently selected is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2809).

If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for distribution determination is not "0" (step S2801: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for the distribution determination (step S2810). Then, if the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S2811: NO), the processing of steps S2805 to S2809 already described is executed. Thus, in a situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is not fixed, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process can fluctuate each time a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. It will happen.

On the other hand, when the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for distribution determination after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2811: YES), an initial probability setting process for distribution determination is executed (step S2812). In the setting process, the flag of the main side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability among the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected in the case of a high certainty winning result. setting process.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process is higher than when the probability is low, the situation is such that the winning result occurs in the success/failure determination process for the number of times it continues. continue until As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly probable hit result in the win/fail determination process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of a winning result being selected in the success/failure determination process is higher than in the case of a low probability continues.

Even in a situation where the probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process continues to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the probability is set.

In the distribution determination process, when the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode becomes higher than when the probability is low, the situation continues until the open/close execution mode continues for the number of times. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the occurrence of a high-probability hit result in the distribution determination process. Further, there are a plurality of types of the number of times of continuation, and the number of times of continuation is selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is higher than when the probability is low is maintained.

Even in a situation where the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process continues to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability may fluctuate. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the probability is set.

The number of continuations for the success/failure determination process and the number of continuations for the distribution determination process are individually determined, and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are also different. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

In addition, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the transition to the distribution execution mode will occur in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process or the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. As a result, even if the number of continuations for the propriety determination process and the number of continuations for the distribution determination process are individually determined and the types of the number of continuations that can be selected are also different, they can be kept within a predetermined probability range.

<Eighth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is ensured. Even if a game ball is detected at 69, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode may not occur. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the prize valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. transition does not occur. In addition, when a prize is won in the through prize winning section 35 for distribution, the probability of transitioning to the distribution execution mode and winning varies depending on the game state. The configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the types of winning results in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of win results in this embodiment. The winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being a winning result in the win/fail determination process (step S403) in the main side MPU 92, as in the first embodiment. A plurality of types of winning results are common in that they serve as a trigger for starting the valid winning period of the through-winning section 35 for sorting, but the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process, the winning probability in the sorting judgment process, and the V prize. occurs, the combination of the winning probabilities of the V prize lottery process to be executed is changed to a mutually different type. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, the selected winning result will be handled unless a shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs triggered by the game round in which the type determination process is executed. The setting of each winning probability is not performed.

As the distribution destination of the hit result, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the low probability hit result, the first high probability hit result, the second high probability hit result, the third high probability hit result, and the second There are 4 high probability winning results and a 5th high probability winning result. When the result is a low certainty winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/20, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 1/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/4. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/400. In the case of the first high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/4, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 1/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the second high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/8, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 2/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the third high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/10, the winning probability in the sorting judgment process is 2/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fourth high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is 1/20, the winning probability in the distribution judgment process is 4/5, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. When the fifth high probability result is obtained, the winning probability of the success/failure determination process is 1/40, which is a probability lower than that of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/1. Thus, the winning probability of the V prize lottery process is 1/1. In this case, the combined probability value obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40.

It should be noted that the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process regardless of which winning result is selected is fixed at 1/2 of the winning result in the distribution determination process. It's becoming

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing distribution processing in this embodiment. In addition, the process for distribution is performed in step S310 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

In the allocation process, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 (step S2901: YES), the V winning lottery process is executed (step S2902). In the V winning lottery process, the V winning lottery table corresponding to the current lottery state is read from the main ROM 93, the numerical information of the lottery counter updated periodically is read from the main RAM 94, and the read numerical information is read. is collated with the read lottery table for V prize. If the result of the V winning lottery process is V winning (step S2903: YES), the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2904). As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the current distribution execution mode ends, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Also, in step S2905, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 103. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, if a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the processing of step S2905 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2906). In other processes, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 and steps S1209 to S1222 of the sorting process (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the case of executing the winning determination process, the distribution determination process and the V winning lottery process in a mode corresponding to one of the high probability hit results, it corresponds to the low probability hit result The combined probability is higher than in the case where the winning/failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V prize lottery process are executed in such a manner. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of any high-probability result.

Depending on the type of high certainty winning result, the combination of winning probability in win/fail judgment processing, winning probability in distribution judging processing, and winning probability in V prize lottery processing is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process, the winning probability in the distribution judging process, and the winning probability in the V winning lottery process, and thereby diversify the games. Become.

The combined probability is different depending on the type of high probability winning result. This makes it possible to create advantages and disadvantages even in high-probability results. In addition, even when triggered by any of the high-probability winning results, the combined probability is 1/40 or less, which is the upper limit reference probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

In the fifth high probability winning result, the winning probability in the win/fail judgment process is lower than that in the case of the low probability winning result, but the winning probability in the distribution judgment process and the winning probability in the V prize lottery process are 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the success/failure determination process, and a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is performed. It certainly occurs, and when the V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode certainly occurs. In this situation, as long as winning results are obtained in the success/failure determination process, there is a high probability that a shift to the open/close execution mode will occur. becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments. Moreover, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the combined configuration.

(1) A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a prize is awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35 . The predetermined number may be one or two or more. In addition, when a prize is awarded to the distribution through prize winning section 35, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out regardless of whether or not the prize winning validity period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 is reached. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out only when a prize is won in the distribution through winning section 35 during a period different from the winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35. good. In these cases, the profit of the payout of the game ball is provided for the occurrence of the winning to the through-winning-for-distribution winning section 35 in a period different from the valid winning period of the through-winning-for-distribution winning section 35.例文帳に追加. Further, instead of this configuration, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out only when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35. good. In this case, it is possible to increase the advantage of the valid winning period.

(2) When a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode is surely generated, when a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35, a distribution is performed. A lottery process for determining whether to generate the minute execution mode (for example, a probability of 10% is generated) is executed, and when the lottery process is generated and won, the distribution execution mode is activated. It is good also as the structure which generate|occur|produces. In this case, the valid winning period of the distribution through winning section 35 may be continued until the distribution execution mode occurs. When the number of winning prizes reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or when the number of occurrences of the lottery process reaches a specific number (for example, 10), the valid prize winning period of the distribution through prize winning section 35 ends. good too.

(3) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started when the prize winning effective period of the distribution thru winning section 35 is started, the distribution thru In the prize winning effective period of the prize winning section 35, the variable display of the pattern in the distribution display section 42c is started at the timing when the prize to the distribution through prize winning section 35 occurs or the timing when the distribution execution mode is started. good too.

(4) In the second distribution execution mode, in place of the configuration in which the V prize does not basically occur, even in the second distribution execution mode, the V prize is less likely to occur than in the first distribution execution mode. A configuration in which a prize can be awarded may be adopted. For example, while the opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged in the V guidance position is the first distribution mode. The period of the second distribution execution mode may be shorter than that of the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V-induction position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. A game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being arranged at the V guide position. In these cases, even in the second distribution execution mode, a V winning can occur in a regular game, so it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the second distribution execution mode.

In this configuration, the same open/close execution mode may occur when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. In addition, instead of the configuration, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the shift to the opening and closing execution mode is more advantageous for the player than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. may be configured. For example, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the number of executions of the round game that enables winning to the special electric winning device 37 is higher than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of prizes awarded to the special electric prize winning device 37 during the opening/closing execution mode may increase. Also, for example, when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode, the upper limit number of winning to the special electric winning device 37 in each round game is larger than when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening/closing execution mode may be increased. In these cases, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction that the V winning has occurred in the second allocation execution mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the V winning is relatively low.

(5) When a V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing execution mode may not occur.

(6) When a V win occurs in the second allocation execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may output an external signal to the management computer of the game hall.

(7) If a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, an abnormality occurs in any one of the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the pattern display device 44, or a predetermined combination. It is good also as a structure by which alerting|reporting is performed. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation other than the distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 may output an external signal to the management computer of the game hall.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the same open/close execution mode occurs when V winning occurs in the first distribution execution mode and when V winning occurs in the second distribution execution mode. may be This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the opening/closing execution mode.

(9) A third distribution execution mode may be set in addition to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments. For example, while the opening mode of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the third distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged in the V guidance position is the first distribution mode. The period of the third distribution execution mode may be shorter than that of the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the third distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V-induction position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. A game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being arranged at the V guide position.

(10) The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 is not limited to the configuration in each of the above embodiments. In addition, the rolling portion is provided with a plurality of drop holes for game balls, and the game balls that have won a prize in the sorting prize winning device 36 roll in the rolling area and then fall into one of the drop holes. good too. Then, when the game ball falls into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize, the configuration may be such that the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs as the occurrence of the V prize. In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the game ball is guided to the rolling area so that the game ball can fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize, whereas in the second distribution execution mode , the game ball may be led out to the rolling area so that the game ball does not fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize.

(11) The special electric prize winning device 37 may not be provided, and each round game may be performed by opening the distribution prize device 36 in the open/close execution mode.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is generated as a privilege when a V prize is won in the distribution execution mode, the winning/failure lottery mode after the distribution execution mode may be configured to be a high probability mode. The support mode after the execution mode may be configured to be the high-frequency support mode, or may be configured to generate a large amount of game balls to be paid out.

(13) Reservation information (hereinafter referred to as first reservation information) acquired when winning to the first operation unit 32 occurs and suspension information acquired when winning to the second operation unit 33 occurs ( hereinafter referred to as second pending information) may be stored separately. In this case, it may be configured such that the player's advantage is different between the first reservation information and the second reservation information when the success/failure determination process is executed. For example, the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the second reserved information may be more advantageous to the player than the case where the success/failure determination process is executed for the first reserved information. Specifically, the case where the hit/fail determination process is executed for the second reserved information and the hit result is more likely than the hit result when the hit/fail judgment process is executed for the first reserved information Alternatively, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process may be increased.

Further, in the configuration in which the first pending information and the second pending information are stored separately as described above, regardless of whether it is the first pending information or the second pending information, the order in which it is acquired determines whether it is correct or not. It may be configured to be a processing execution target, and regardless of the order in which it is acquired, the second pending information may be prioritized over the first pending information to be the execution target of the propriety determination processing.

(14) In the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 may not be arranged at the V guidance position to ensure that the V prize does not occur.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the open/close execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the number of times the special electric prize winning device 37 wins in the opening and closing execution mode increases because the number of times of execution of the round game that enables the winning of the prize to the special electric prize winning device 37 increases. may be configured. Also, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode is better than the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the second distribution execution mode. Alternatively, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 37 in each round game may be increased, so that the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening/closing execution mode may be increased as a result.

(16) If the result of the winning/failure determination process is a winning result, the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35 does not occur, but the distribution execution mode occurs, and in the distribution execution mode, V The configuration may be such that the opening/closing execution mode occurs when a prize is won. In this case, in the distribution execution mode, the game ball that has won the distribution prize device 36 may be configured to generate a V prize with a predetermined probability of greater than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode occurs when the result of the win/fail determination process is a winning result, when the game ball enters the first ball entering section, the ball enters the second ball entering section. is possible and the game ball enters the second ball entry portion, the distribution execution mode occurs, and when V winning occurs in the distribution execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode may occur. .

(17) In the distribution execution mode, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 may be configured not to be in the driven state, and in the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state, whereas the first In the distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be driven. In the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be driven, but in the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be configured so as not to be in a driving state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 may be configured not to be in the driving state, and in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state. However, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be in the driven state, and in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be Although it can be in the driving state, the guiding unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

(18) A configuration may be adopted in which the through prize winning section 35 for sorting is provided below the second operating section 33 . In this case, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 does not enter the driving state during the prize winning effective period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, and the second operating section 33 is guided during a period different from the winning valid period. A configuration in which the unit 52 can be in a driven state may be adopted.

(19) Even if the results of the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process result in a high-probability winning result, if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the success/failure lottery mode after the distribution execution mode ends is set to the low-probability mode. It may be configured to be In this case, the support mode may be set to a low-frequency support mode, or may be set to a high-frequency support mode that continues until the next winning result occurs. It may be configured to be set to a high-frequency support mode that continues until the game cycle is completed.

In addition, even if the result of the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process is a low probability hit result, if the opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the support mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be

(20) When the distribution execution mode is entered, the V winning detection sensor 69 may reliably detect the game ball regardless of the type. For example, the path through which the game balls that have won the prize distribution device 36 pass does not branch into the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage area 65c, but has only the V prize passage area 65c. A game ball that has won a prize in the device 36 may pass through the V winning passage area 65 c and be reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 . Further, instead of this configuration, the passage through which the winning game balls of the sorting prize winning device 36 pass is branched into the discharge passage region 65b and the V winning passage region 65c as in the above embodiments. Even in the distribution execution mode, at least one of the game balls winning the distribution winning device 36 passes through the V winning path area 65c and is reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. may be configured to perform drive control.

(21) When a game ball that has won a prize in the distribution winning device 36 is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 replaces the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is reliably generated. It is good also as a structure which an open-close execution mode generate|occur|produces with a predetermined probability (probability greater than 0% and less than 100%) when a game ball is detected in . For example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the lottery process is executed by the main side MPU 92, and when the lottery process results in a winning, the open/close execution mode may be generated. . As a result, the player expects not only the occurrence of the V winning, but also the occurrence of winning in the lottery process.

(22) Display control based on commands output from the main controller 81 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 101 based on commands output from the main controller 81 The configuration may be such that the device 111 controls the sound emission control device 101 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be employed, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 81 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 81 . Also, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 101 and the configuration of the command output from the sound emission control device 101 to the display control device 111 are arbitrary.

(23) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 44, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by combining all or part of the above modes. good.

(24) Other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded upon entry, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mammoth ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are recycled without being discharged to island facilities. In addition, the player cannot replenish the pachinko machine with game balls, the number of game balls usable by the player is managed as data, and the shooting operation is performed in a situation where the number of usable game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which game balls are shot and the number of usable game balls is subtracted when the shooting is performed. In this case, when a prize is generated in the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution prize winning device 36, or the special electric prize winning device 37, etc., the number of game balls that can be used increases in terms of data. becomes.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, only the first distribution execution mode may exist as the distribution execution mode. In this case, when the distribution execution mode occurs, V winning is generated by continuing the shooting of game balls aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 . When this configuration is applied to the fourth to eighth embodiments, the first distribution execution mode will occur without fail when the transition to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process.

(26) In the above-described fourth to eighth embodiments, if a prize is won in the distribution through prize winning section 35 during the winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning section 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. Although the transition certainly occurs, the distribution probability between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may vary according to the game state. For example, in the case of the fourth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when any of the first to fifth high probability results is obtained, the first distribution is performed than when the low probability results are obtained. A configuration may be adopted in which the distribution probability to the execution mode is increased and the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is different for each of the first to fifth high probability winning results. Further, for example, in the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, in the distribution determination probability lottery process, the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is changed, and in the success/failure determination process At least one of the probabilities is corrected so that the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the hit result is selected and the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is equal to or less than a predetermined value. good too.

(27) When the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is changed with the result of the high probability hit result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, It is good also as a structure changed into the probability higher than the said probability set ignited by the low certainty hit result. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of having a high probability hit result.

(28) In the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, when the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process is changed as a result of the high probability hitting result, the low probability hitting result It may be configured such that the probability can be changed to a probability lower than the set probability when the probability becomes. However, in order to secure the advantage of having become a highly accurate hit result, in this case, the probability that the hit result is selected in the success judgment process and the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process Winning and Transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process so that the composite probability obtained by accumulating the probability is higher than the composite probability of each probability set as a result of the low probability hit result It is preferable that the probability of winning is set.

(29) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process are determined. At least one of the probability that a winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability of winning in the distribution execution mode in the distribution judgment process is corrected so that the integrated combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value. In addition to or instead of this, there is a probability that a winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process so that the above synthesis probability is equal to or greater than a specific value, and a transition to a distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. At least one of the winning probabilities may be modified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the combination probability from becoming lower than expected.

(30) In the above fifth embodiment to the above seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are high. When the probability is set to be higher than that at the time of the low probability, the probability may be corrected so that the combined probability obtained by accumulating the probability always becomes the predetermined probability. For example, in the fifth embodiment, in the distribution determination probability correction processing (step S2307), the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination processing is increased so that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. Fixed.

Further, for example, in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process A situation can occur in which one of them is set to a probability at a low probability and the other is set to a probability triggered by a high probability result. In such a case, while one of the probabilities set as the probability at the time of the low probability remains as it is, the other probability is set so that the combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. As a result, when a high-probability hit result occurs in at least one of the win/fail determination process and the distribution determination process, the combined probability becomes the predetermined probability.

Further, for example, in the seventh embodiment, one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result is shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is selected first. A situation can occur in which the number of continuations is "0" and the probability of the low probability is set, while the number of continuations is 1 or more and the probability of the high probability is maintained. In such a case, at the timing when the number of continuations on one side is "0" and set to a low probability, the probability of the side with the number of continuations of 1 or more is higher than before so that the above-mentioned combined probability becomes a predetermined probability. will be changed with high probability. As a result, chances for changing the probability are diversified.

(31) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode according to the probability. may be different, may be configured not to notify the probability at all, or may be configured to perform notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability.

(32) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process may be notified as it is, and according to the probability The selection probabilities of the notification modes may be different, the probability may not be notified at all, or the notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability may be performed.

(33) In the above-described eighth embodiment, the V winning lottery process may be configured such that the probability of winning the V winning prize is notified as it is, or the selection probability of the notification mode is different according to the probability. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the probability is not notified at all, or the configuration may be such that a notification indicating whether or not the probability is equal to or greater than a predetermined probability is executed.

(34) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is not executed unless the opening/closing execution mode that has shifted due to the occurrence of V winning is terminated. Even if the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur, the game state transition processing (FIG. 37) may be executed when the transition to the distribution execution mode occurs. The configuration may be such that the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed when the game round resulting in a winning result in the win/fail judgment process ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the probability of selecting a winning result in the success/failure determination process and the probability of winning a transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will vary.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, in the game state transition process (FIG. 39), the probability lottery process for distribution determination may be executed prior to the probability lottery process for win/fail determination. In this case, if the combined probability obtained by multiplying the probability that the winning result is selected in the success/failure determination process and the probability that the winning result will be shifted to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the success/failure determination is made. The probability that the winning outcome will be selected in the process will be modified.

(36) A configuration in which a situation in which a higher probability than the low probability is set or can be set continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment is changed to an embodiment other than the seventh embodiment. may be applied to

(37) In the above seventh embodiment, when the probability is set and the number of continuations is set with the high probability result as a trigger, the set probability is ``0''. It is good also as a structure held until it becomes. This makes it easier for the player to understand the set state of the probability.

(38) In the above-described eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning results being selected in the win/fail determination process does not change. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V prize lottery process will change. For this configuration, a configuration in which probability correction processing is executed so that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, or as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the trigger for changing each probability is different may be applied, and a configuration in which the situation where the probability is higher than the low probability or can be higher continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment may be applied. may apply.

(39) In the above-described eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process does not change. In this case, the probability that a winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process and the probability of winning a V prize in the V prize lottery process will change. For this configuration, a configuration in which probability correction processing is executed so that the combined probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, or as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the trigger for changing each probability is different may be applied, and a configuration in which the situation where the probability is higher than the low probability or can be higher continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment may be applied. may apply.

(40) In contrast to the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is surely generated when the game round that resulted in a winning result in the winning judgment process ends, the probability of winning in the winning judgment process becomes higher than when the probability is low. A configuration may be applied in which this situation continues until the opening/closing execution mode occurs a predetermined number of times, and there are a plurality of types of the predetermined number of times. In this case, the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first operation unit 32 and the pending information acquired based on the winning of the second operating unit 33 are stored separately, and which of the pending information is The selection rate of the predetermined number of times, the number of types of the predetermined number of times, and the expected value of selection of the predetermined number of times may be different depending on. As a result, it is possible to change the selection mode of the predetermined number of times according to the type of the actuating portions 32 and 33 that triggered acquisition of the hold information, thereby diversifying the game.

(41) There are three or more types of probabilities that result in a win in the win/fail determination process, in contrast to the configuration in which the open/close execution mode is reliably generated when the game cycle that resulted in a hit in the win/fail determination process ends. configuration may be applied.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
State setting means (function for executing distribution standby processing in the main side MPU 92) for setting a state (distribution execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
A privilege (transition to opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of step S1311 in the main side MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless a privilege giving opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. Variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
A privilege (transition to opening/closing execution mode) is given to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. privilege granting means (function for executing the processing of step S1311 in the main side MPU 92);
Predetermined lottery means (in the first embodiment, step S1003 and step S1004 are executed in the main side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined lottery process based on occurrence of a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning of the through prize winning section 35 for distribution) a function to execute the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment);
a first state setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1104 and S1105 in the main side MPU 92) that sets a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
a second state setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1106 and S1107 in the main side MPU 92) that sets a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result; ,
with
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the above. The game machine is characterized in that the opportunity to give the privilege is more likely to occur than in the case of a non-specific result.

According to the feature A2, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process executed based on the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity is a specific result, the privilege provision opportunity is more likely to occur than when the result is a non-specific result. As a result, the player not only expects that the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means will be executed, but also expects that the result of the predetermined lottery process will be a specific result. Therefore, the number of objects expected by the player increases, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed not only when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result, but also when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result. As a result, when the predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, the variable ball entrance control of the variable ball entrance means is executed regardless of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means to be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature A3. Characteristically characterized in that the variable ball entry means or the variable ball entry means different therefrom (special electric prize winning device 37) is then opened as the award of the privilege based on the occurrence of the privilege awarding opportunity. The gaming machine described in A2.

According to the feature A3, when the privilege granting opportunity occurs, the variable ball entering means or the variable entering means different from the variable entering means is opened separately from the variable entering means for the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity. state. As a result, it is possible to extend the state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state by generating the opportunity to give the privilege.

Feature A4. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving to the player a given object, which is either a game ball or information on the number of usable game balls, based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means ), the gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3.

According to feature A4, since the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases as a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It is possible to raise the degree of attention to. With the configuration of feature A2, when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the variable ball entrance control of the variable ball entrance means is executed. Even if the result of (1) is a non-specific result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

Feature A5. In the state where the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, the total period of the open state of the variable ball entry means is variable in relation to the shooting cycle of the game ball. It is set to a period that allows a specific number of game balls to enter the ball entry means,
In the state where the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specified result, the total period of the open state in the variable ball entry means is related to the shooting cycle of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that the period is set to allow the specific number of game balls to be entered into the variable ball entry means.

According to feature A5, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, it is equivalent to the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result while the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is being executed. number of game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means. This makes it possible to reduce the player's sense of disadvantage when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result.

Feature A6. A state in which the variable ball entry control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result, and a state in which the variable ball entrance control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specified result The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means differs depending on the state.

According to feature A6, the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result in relation to the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the state where the variable ball entering control of the variable ball entering means is executed. It is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage between the case and the non-specific result.

Feature A7. The game according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege when the privilege granting opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed. machine.

If a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, there is a high possibility that the privilege grant opportunity is caused by fraudulent activity. Under such circumstances, according to the feature A7, if a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed, the privilege is not granted, so that the privilege is not granted for such fraudulent activity. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A8. The predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entering portion (distribution through winning portion 35),
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during a period different from the predetermined effective period, the The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, wherein a predetermined lottery process is not executed.

According to the feature A8, since the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, the game ball is first entered into the predetermined ball entering portion in order to generate the privilege giving opportunity. After that, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. As a result, the target to which the game ball is aimed is changed step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section during the prescribed validity period, the prescribed lottery process is executed, and even if the game ball enters the prescribed ball entry section during a period different from the prescribed validity period, the predetermined Lottery processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry portion triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and it is possible to set the execution frequency of the predetermined lottery process to an appropriate frequency.

Feature A9. When the privilege provision opportunity occurs in a state in which the variable ball entry control is executed triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the non-specific result, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result Means ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, characterized by having a function of executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main side MPU 92 (the display side MPU 113).

According to the feature A9, whether the privilege provision opportunity occurred in a state where the variable entrance control is being executed triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming a non-specific result, or whether the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether the privilege provision opportunity has occurred in the state where the variable ball entry control is being executed with the fact that it has become as a trigger.

Feature A10. The game machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, further comprising result notification means (distribution display section 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

According to feature A10, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature A11. first control means (main side MPU 92) having the privilege provision means, the predetermined lottery means, the first state setting means, and the second state setting means;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

According to feature A11, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

Feature A12. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a predetermined valid period (winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur specific lottery means for executing specific lottery processing for determining whether or not to generate
A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( A gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92.

According to feature A12, the means for informing that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for informing the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result informing means. are provided separately as As a result, each content can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

Feature A13. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the predetermined effective period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to feature A12, further comprising means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the display device 44).

According to feature A13, a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and during the predetermined effective period, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effect during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and including the predetermined effective period, each content can be monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means. It is possible to do it individually.

Feature A14. Any one of the characteristics A10 to A13, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is started when the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed is started. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process at the start of the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed.

Feature A15. The game according to any one of features A10 to A14, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is continued while the variable ball entry control is being executed. machine.

According to the feature A15, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process by checking the result notification means at any timing while the variable ball entry control is being executed.

Feature A16. When a specific lottery opportunity (a prize winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a predetermined valid period (winning valid period of the distribution through prize winning unit 35) in which the predetermined lottery opportunity can occur specific lottery means for executing specific lottery processing for determining whether or not to generate
A specific unit effect is started by a specific effect means (symbol display device 44), and a unit effect control means (display side) for making the execution mode of the specific unit effect correspond to the lottery result of the specific lottery process after the lapse of a predetermined period. MPU 113);
with
The execution mode of the specific unit performance is an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, and the predetermined effective period occurs in a situation where the specific unit performance is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

According to the feature A16, by executing the specific unit performance corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process, it is possible to provide the performance corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. In this case, the specific unit performance is continued for a predetermined effective period even after the execution mode becomes an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is the winning result. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the predetermined effective period by using the specific unit performance that has been executed before the predetermined effective period is started.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the unit effect control means continues the specific unit effect even in a state where the variable ball entry control is executed.

According to feature A17, by executing the specific unit effect including the state in which the variable entry control is executed, the period before the start of the predetermined effective period, the predetermined effective period, and the variable entry control are executed. It is possible to provide a series of specific unit effects using the period of time.

Feature A18. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the unit performance control means, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs, sets the execution mode of the specific unit performance to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity.

According to the feature A18, when the privilege giving opportunity occurs in the state where the variable entrance control is executed, the execution mode of the specific unit performance becomes a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, so that the specific unit performance is performed. It is possible to notify the occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity by using it.

Feature A19. The unit effect control means performs variable display of patterns in a plurality of variable display areas as the specific unit effect. In a situation in which the same type of pattern is stop-displayed in some of the plurality of variable display regions to form a combination of ready-to-win patterns, the variable display of the patterns is continued in the remaining variable display regions, The game according to feature A18, characterized in that, when a privilege giving opportunity occurs, a pattern of the same kind as a pattern forming the combination of the ready-to-win patterns is stop-displayed in the remaining variable display area. machine.

According to feature A19, it is possible to execute a series of effects using variable display of patterns during the period before the predetermined effective period starts, the predetermined effective period, and the period during which the variable entry control is executed. . In addition, when the predetermined valid period starts, the reach variation display is started, and when the opportunity to grant the privilege occurs, the combination of the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible to notify using the aspect of.

Feature A20. A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( a function of executing the processes of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92;
Predetermined operation means (vibration means) is provided so that when the predetermined unit motion is started and the predetermined unit motion is terminated, the operation content corresponds to whether or not the privilege giving opportunity occurs in the state in which the variable ball entry control is executed. predetermined operation control means for controlling the minute display unit 42c) (function for executing the processes of steps S905, S1001, S1101, S1201, S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A20, the operation means for informing that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, the state in which the variable ball entry control is being executed, and the presence/absence of the privilege giving opportunity. are separately provided as specific operation means and predetermined operation means. Thus, in a configuration in which a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the predetermined effective period and including the predetermined effective period, each period can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. can be done.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to characteristic A20, wherein the predetermined action control means starts the predetermined unit action when the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature A21, the manager of the gaming hall can clearly grasp whether or not the predetermined validity period has started by confirming whether or not the predetermined unit action has started in the predetermined action means. .

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the specific action control means terminates the specific unit action before the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature A22, the result of the specific lottery process is notified by the specific action means before the predetermined effective period starts. As a result, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined validity period that occurs thereafter is valid by confirming the specific action means.

Feature A23. a first control means (main side MPU 92) having the predetermined lottery means, the specific lottery means, and the privilege provision means;
Second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the specific effect means based on information transmitted by the first control means;
with
The game machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, wherein the first control means has the specific action control means and the predetermined action control means.

According to feature A23, since the specific action means and the predetermined action means are directly controlled by the first control means, it is possible to improve the reliability of the contents of the specific action means and the predetermined action means. On the other hand, since the specific effect means is controlled by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

Feature A24. The privilege granting means is provided when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in a state in which the variable ball entry control triggered by the result of the predetermined lottery processing becoming the non-specific result, and when the predetermined lottery processing is performed. Characteristic features A2 through A2, characterized in that the awarding mode of the privilege is different from when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in a state where the variable entrance control triggered by the result becoming the specified result is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

According to the feature A24, the manner in which the privilege is granted when the privilege granting opportunity occurs differs depending on whether the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result or a specific result. Even if the result of the processing is a non-specific result, the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, and if the privilege giving opportunity occurs in the state where the variable entry control is executed, the privilege is given. It is possible to make a difference corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process also in the content of the privilege in the given configuration.

Feature A25. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, a specific game state in which the variable ball entry means or a variable ball entry means different from it is in an open state occurs after that as the award of the privilege,
The privilege granting means, when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the privilege grant opportunity is generated, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specified result and the privilege grant opportunity is generated, The gaming machine according to feature A24, characterized in that the minimum time required until the specific gaming state ends is differentiated.

According to the feature A25, the specific game state ends when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result and a privilege grant opportunity occurs and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specific result and a privilege grant opportunity occurs. Due to the difference in the minimum time required to reach, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two in terms of the appearance of the action contents of the game.

Feature A26. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is in the open state in the specific game state, means (payout device 86, payout control device 87),
The privilege granting means generates the specified gaming state when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs, and the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. Compared to the case where the shooting operation is performed in the same manner, the expected number of grant targets in the specific game state is made to be about the same. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein:

According to the characteristic A26, when a specific game state occurs, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an advantage or a disadvantage according to the result of the predetermined lottery process with respect to the grant number of the grant target in the specific game state.

Feature A27. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the specific game state due to the fact that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A26, characterized in that the minimum time required to finish the game is made longer than the specific game state due to the occurrence of a.

According to the feature A27, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is longer, so that It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity is legitimate.

Feature A28. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the specified result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the specific game state due to the fact that the result of the predetermined lottery processing becomes the non-specific result and the privilege granting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A27, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific game state is maintained in the closed state is longer than in the specific game state due to the occurrence of .

According to the feature A28, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. becomes possible.

For the configuration of features A1 to A28, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning a prize to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a specific period (distribution execution mode) or a period that allows the specific period to start (distribution a specific lottery means (a function of executing steps S301 and S403 in the main side MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a prize winning valid period of the through prize winning section 35;
A predetermined lottery for executing a predetermined lottery process when a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning a prize in a through prize winning section 35 for distribution) occurs based on a game operation of a player after the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result. means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1003 and S1004 in the main MPU 92; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the main MPU 92);
a specific period setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1107 in the main side MPU 92) for performing the specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when the lottery result of the specific lottery process is the winning result, the lottery result of the specific lottery process is not the specific period corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. After that, a specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process executed by the generation of the predetermined lottery opportunity based on the game operation of the player is performed. As a result, in a situation in which the occurrence of the specific period is confirmed, the player performs the game operation while expecting that the content of the specific period will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entering portion (distribution through winning portion 35).

According to the feature B2, since the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion, in the configuration for generating the predetermined lottery opportunity based on the game operation of the player, the predetermined lottery opportunity It is possible to clarify the occurrence conditions.

Feature B3. After the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result, a predetermined valid period (a winning valid period for the distribution through prize winning section 35) is generated,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during the predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion during a period different from the predetermined effective period, the The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein a predetermined lottery process is not executed.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to restrict the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry portion triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and the result of the specific lottery process is not a winning result. It is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery process from being executed without fail.

Feature B4. When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion, either the game ball or the usable game ball number information is provided in any of the predetermined effective period and a period different from the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to feature B3, further comprising means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) for awarding an object to the player.

According to the feature B4, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering portion, the grant mode is given to the player even if it is a period different from the predetermined effective period, so the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering portion. It is possible to give a profit to the player for the occurrence of the entry of the ball.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period setting means starts the specific period when the predetermined lottery process is executed.

According to the feature B5, the predetermined lottery opportunity can be set not only as the execution timing of the predetermined lottery process but also as the start timing of the specific period. As a result, it is possible to facilitate understanding of the game content compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising result notification means (distribution display section 42c) for notifying information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process.

According to feature B6, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B7. a first control means (main side MPU 92) having the specific lottery means, the predetermined lottery means, and the specific period setting means;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the result notification means is controlled by the first control means.

According to feature B7, it is possible to increase the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification means.

Feature B8. A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( A gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92.

According to feature B8, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notification means. are provided separately as As a result, each content can be individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notification means.

Feature B9. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the specific period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol display device) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the specific period. 44) is provided with a means (display side MPU 113) for controlling the gaming machine according to feature B8.

According to feature B9, a series of effects are executed by the specific effect means before the start of the specific period and including the specific period, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effects during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means in this way, each content can be individually monitored by checking the specific action means and the result notification means. can be done.

Feature B10. The game machine according to any one of features B6 to B9, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is started when the specific period is started.

According to feature B10, it is possible to notify the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process at the start of the specific period.

Feature B11. The game machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process by the result notification means is continued during the specific period.

According to the characteristic B11, it is possible to grasp the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process by checking the result notification means at any timing of the specific period.

Feature B12. Variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature B12, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features B1 to B12, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) for providing the
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 and a function to execute the processing of step S1306);
with
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (the process of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the feature C1, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the predetermined unit action is performed by the predetermined action means during the specific period, so that it is possible to ascertain whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined action means. In addition, in a configuration in which a privilege may or may not be granted depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a predetermined The execution mode of the unit operation changes. As a result, the predetermined unit motion can function not only as the motion for notifying the specific period, but also as the motion for notifying whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

Feature C2. A first control means (main side MPU 92) that controls the progress of the game;
A second control means (sound and light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) that executes processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means is
In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) for providing the
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 and a function to execute the processing of step S1306);
with
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (the process of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the feature C2, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the predetermined unit action is performed by the predetermined action means during the specific period, so that it is possible to ascertain whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined action means. In addition, in a configuration in which a privilege may or may not be granted depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a predetermined The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thereby, it is possible to make the predetermined unit action function not only as an action for notifying the specific period, but also as an action for notifying whether or not a privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period.

Further, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means for executing processing for controlling the execution of the effect, the predetermined operation means is the second control means. is directly controlled by the first control means instead of This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the contents of the predetermined operating means.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode determining means makes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit action is terminated correspond to whether or not the privilege giving opportunity occurs during the specific period. .

According to the feature C3, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege giving opportunity has occurred in a specific period by checking the notification result when the predetermined unit motion is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not the opportunity to provide the privilege has occurred, based on the content of the predetermined operation means, an easy-to-understand timing.

Feature C4. The specific period is configured to continue until a termination condition is satisfied even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs,
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the predetermined motion control means terminates the predetermined unit motion when the specific period ends.

According to feature C4, the specific period continues even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs, so that the period during which the specific period is executed does not fluctuate according to the occurrence timing of the privilege grant opportunity. It becomes possible. Further, since the predetermined unit action ends when the specific period ends, it is possible to grasp the end timing of the specific period by checking the predetermined action means.

Feature C5. The mode determination means makes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit action is terminated correspond to whether or not the privilege provision opportunity occurs during the specific period,
The gaming machine is provided with notification executing means (display-side MPU 113) for executing notification corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege provision opportunity when the privilege provision opportunity occurs during the specific period. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized by:

According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege provision opportunity has occurred in a specific period by checking the notification result when the predetermined unit motion is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of confirmation when confirming whether or not the opportunity to provide the privilege has occurred, based on the content of the predetermined operation means, an easy-to-understand timing. On the other hand, when a privilege giving opportunity occurs during a specific period, the corresponding notification is executed, so that the player can easily grasp that the privilege giving opportunity has occurred.

Feature C6. Means for starting the specific period (step S1104 ~ a function to execute the processing of step S1107),
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined action control means starts the predetermined unit action when the predetermined valid period starts.

According to feature C6, it is also possible to notify that the predetermined effective period is reached by using the predetermined unit operation.

Feature C7. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning a prize in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, the specific period or a period that allows the specific period to start (distribution through winning unit 35 a specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a winning valid period (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
A specific operation control means (special figure display unit 42a) that controls the specific operation means (special figure display unit 42a) so that the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when starting the specific unit operation and ending the specific unit operation ( a function of executing the processes of steps S412, S803 and S804 in the main MPU 92;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C7, the operation means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and the operation means for notifying that it is the specific period and whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred. are separately provided as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. This makes it possible to individually monitor each period by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means.

Feature C8. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit production is started, and when the specific period is executed after that, the specific production means (symbol display device) is arranged so that the specific unit production is continued during the specific period. 44) is provided with means (display side MPU 113).

According to the feature C8, a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of the effects during these periods. In addition, in the configuration in which a series of effects including before the start of the specific period and during the specific period are executed by the specific effect means in this way, each period can be individually monitored by checking the specific action means and the predetermined action means. can be done.

Feature C9. Variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball that enters the variable ball entering means.

According to the characteristic C9, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 or the feature C2 is provided, and the specific unit action is executed by the specific action means during the specific period, thereby clarifying that it is the specific period and that the privilege provision opportunity has occurred. It is possible to grasp the

For the configuration of features C1 to C9, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. In a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player receives a privilege (transition to the opening and closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity (detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) due to the player's game operation. (a function of executing the processing of step S1311 in the main MPU 92) that provides
As the specific period, at least a first specific period (first distribution execution mode) and a second specific period (second distribution execution mode) are set so that the degree of expectation for occurrence of the privilege provision opportunity is different. cage,
The privilege granting means is characterized in that the mode of granting the privilege differs between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the second specific period. game machine.

According to the feature D1, the privilege is granted based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity during the specific period, so that the player performs the game operation while expecting the privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as the specific period, there are a first specific period and a second specific period so that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the opportunity to give the privilege is different. As a result, the specific period is diversified in relation to the degree of expectation of occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, and from this point as well, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this case, the mode of granting the privilege differs between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs during the second specific period. As a result, it is possible to not only differ the degree of expectation of occurrence of the privilege provision opportunity between the first specific period and the second specific period, but also to differentiate the awarding mode of the privilege to be provided when the privilege provision opportunity occurs. , the difference between the first specific period and the second specific period can be clarified.

Feature D2. Based on the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity, a specific game state (opening and closing execution mode) in which the predetermined variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 37) is opened after that is generated as the privilege is given. ,
The privilege granting means, when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the second specific period, until the specific game state ends The game machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the required time is made different.

According to the feature D2, the minimum time required to end the specific game state differs between when the privilege grant opportunity occurs during the first specified period and when the privilege grant opportunity occurs during the second specified period. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two in terms of the appearance of the action contents of the game.

Feature D3. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving the player a given object, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when a game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means. prepared,
The privilege giving means fires in the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity in the first specific period and the specific game state due to the occurrence of the privilege giving opportunity in the second specific period. Characteristic feature D2, characterized in that the number of grant targets expected in the specific game state is about the same as compared to the case where the operation is performed in the same manner. game machine.

According to the feature D3, when the specific game state occurs, regarding the number of grant targets in the specific game state, there is no advantage or disadvantage according to the type of the specific period that triggered the occurrence of the specific game state. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D4. The second specific period is configured to have a lower degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity will occur than the first specific period,
The privilege giving means is such that the specific game state due to the privilege giving opportunity occurring in the second specific period is higher than the specific gaming state due to the privilege giving opportunity occurring in the first specific period , the gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by lengthening the minimum time required for completion.

According to the feature D4, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the occurrence of the second specific period, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends becomes longer, so the privilege grant opportunity occurs. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to check whether the game is legitimate or not.

Feature D5. The privilege giving means is such that the specific game state due to the privilege giving opportunity occurring in the second specific period is higher than the specific gaming state due to the privilege giving opportunity occurring in the first specific period , The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the period during which the variable ball entry means to be opened in the specific game state is maintained in the closed state is lengthened.

According to feature D5, the minimum required time until the specific game state ends is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. becomes possible.

Feature D6. Variable ball entry means (distribution winning device 36) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing distribution start processing and distribution processing in the main side MPU 92) that executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state; ,
with
The specific period is a period during which the variable entrance control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the privilege granting opportunity is generated by a game ball that enters the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature D6, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless the game ball causes a privilege giving opportunity. As a result, when the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable ball entry means, but also plays the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means. It is to be expected that a privilege grant opportunity will occur depending on the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of anticipation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features D1 to D6, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (situation where the probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability changing means capable of producing a situation with a probability different from 6 and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process can vary, and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each lottery process is executed. In addition, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the case of a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process fluctuate at the same time, and the content of the game that progresses through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. can be made very different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. Predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature E2, in order to provide the predetermined privilege, at least the first lottery process must result in a predetermined lottery result and the second lottery process must result in a specific lottery result. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes for targets that the player who expects to receive the predetermined privilege pays attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process affects the probability of giving a predetermined privilege. In this case, the configuration of feature E1 is provided, and both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to diversify the provision probabilities of the predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to largely change the provision probability of the predetermined privilege without largely changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature E2, the second lottery process may be triggered only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, a specific lottery result must be obtained in the second lottery process in order to provide the predetermined privilege, and a predetermined lottery result must be obtained in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the first lottery process.

Feature E3. Characteristic feature E1 or E2, characterized in that at least one of the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process has three or more types. game machine.

According to feature E3, at least one of the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are present in three or more types, so that the probability of each lottery process is determined. Along with being able to diversify, it is also possible to diversify the combination probability of those lottery processes.

Feature E4. The probability changing means determines the predetermined lottery result in a plurality of kinds of lottery processes, including the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the probability is varied so that the increase in the combined probability of the combined probability in the predetermined situation is up to a predetermined increase.

According to feature E4, in a configuration in which both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate, a plurality of types of lottery processes including them can provide a predetermined lottery result. It is possible to prevent the composite probability of the probability of obtaining a lottery result from becoming extremely higher than in the case of a predetermined situation.

Feature E5. The probability changing means changes the target probability, which is one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process, to the other in the plurality of types of lottery processes. Correcting means for correcting according to the probability of the lottery process (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2307 in the main MPU 92, in the sixth embodiment, the processing of steps S2505 and S2605 in the main MPU 92 function to execute (in the seventh embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S2708 and S2808 in the main side MPU 92)).

According to feature E5, by correcting the target probability according to the probabilities of other lottery processes, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different. Even if it is the structure which fluctuates to , it becomes possible to make the amount of increase with respect to the said combination probability in the predetermined situation to the predetermined amount of increase.

Feature E6. The probability varying means varies both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process when a predetermined variation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to feature E6, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate together.

Feature E7. The probability variation means is
a first variation means (a function of executing a first game state transition process in the main side MPU 92) for varying the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process based on the occurrence of the first opportunity;
a second variation means (a function of executing a second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92) for varying the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process based on the occurrence of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E7, a situation where the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result varies in the first lottery process and a situation in which the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result varies in the second lottery process occur separately. This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized by having at least one of the following configuration (1) and the following configuration (2).
(1) The first variation means is configured such that, in the first lottery process, the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or a situation in which the first opportunity occurs a predetermined number of times. It has a means for continuing until (the function of executing the processing of steps S2701 and S2711 in the main side MPU 92).
(2) The second variation means determines that the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or the situation that the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. It has a means for continuing until (the function of executing the processing of steps S2801 and S2811 in the main side MPU 92).

According to feature E8, at least one of the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process continues to a certain extent in which the probability is different from the probability in the predetermined situation. becomes possible. This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates to some extent.

In addition, in the feature E8, the configuration may include means for varying the predetermined number of times or means for varying the specific number of times. In this case, it is possible to diversify the mode of continuation of the situation in which the probability fluctuates.

Feature E9. The first variation means causes the situation in which the probability of obtaining the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or can be different from the probability in the predetermined situation, to continue until the first opportunity occurs a predetermined number of times. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2701 and S2711 in the main MPU 92),
The second variation means causes the situation in which the probability of obtaining the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or can be, to continue until the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2801 and S2811 in the main MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are or can be different numbers of times.

According to feature E9, it is possible to continue to some extent the situation in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different from the probability in the predetermined situation. . This makes it possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates to some extent. In addition, since the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different or may be different times, even if the duration of the situation in which the probability fluctuates in one of the first lottery process and the second lottery process has ended, Regardless, it is possible to continue the situation in which the probability fluctuates for the other. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the fluctuation modes of the respective probabilities, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature E10. The probability changing means sets one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process to be higher than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation. A gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics E1 to E9, characterized in that it can cause a situation in which the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the given situation is higher than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the given situation.

According to feature E10, one of the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process is more favorable than the predetermined situation, and the other is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation. It is possible to generate This makes it possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E11. Notification corresponding to one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is executed, and notification corresponding to the other is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2211 in the main side MPU 92, sound and light side MPU 103).

According to the feature E11, while the notification corresponding to one of the probabilities is executed, the notification corresponding to the other is not executed, so that the content of the notification is confirmed while grasping the part of the lottery probability. It is possible to create a situation that predicts the lottery probability of the part. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the manner of paying attention to the game in relation to each lottery probability, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature E12. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (function of executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, function of executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (situation where the probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability changing means capable of generating a situation with a probability different from 6 and the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main side MPU 92);
Predetermined privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player based on the specific lottery result in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E12, the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process can vary, and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which each lottery process is executed. In addition, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the case of a predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process fluctuate at the same time, and the content of the game that progresses through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. can be made very different. Therefore, the standardization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in order to provide a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in at least the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes for targets that the player who expects to receive the predetermined privilege pays attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the probability obtained by multiplying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process affects the probability of giving a predetermined privilege. In this case, both the probability of obtaining a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of obtaining a specific lottery result in the second lottery process can be different from those in the predetermined situation. This makes it possible to diversify the provision probabilities of the predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to largely change the provision probability of the predetermined privilege without largely changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

In addition, in the configuration of the feature E12, the second lottery process may be executed only when the first lottery process results in the predetermined lottery result. In this case, a specific lottery result must be obtained in the second lottery process in order to provide the predetermined privilege, and a predetermined lottery result must be obtained in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the first lottery process.

For the configuration of features E1 to E12, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the winning/failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Probability changing means (steps S2705 to S2708 or steps S2805 to S2808 in main side MPU 92) capable of creating a situation in which the probability of special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from the predetermined situation functions to perform) and
return means (function of executing the process of step S2712 or step S2812 in the main side MPU 92) for returning the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to the probability in the predetermined situation when the return condition is satisfied;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of return conditions exist.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the probability of obtaining the special lottery result in the special lottery process returns to the probability in the predetermined situation. As a result, if the probability of a special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition makes it difficult for the player to return to the predetermined situation. A player expects a return condition that makes it easy to return to the predetermined situation if the situation is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. After setting the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to be different from the predetermined situation, if a special opportunity occurs in a situation where the return condition is not satisfied, the special lottery The gaming machine of feature F1, wherein the resulting probabilities are variable.

According to the feature F2, the probability of obtaining a special lottery result can change even in a situation where the return condition for returning to the probability in the predetermined situation is not satisfied, so that the setting mode of the probability is diversified, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F3. The probability changing means is capable of generating a situation in which the probability of a special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from a predetermined situation when a special opportunity occurs, and in the special lottery process, the The situation in which the probability of a special lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or can be, continues until the special opportunity occurs a special number of times,
The return condition is satisfied as at least one condition that the special opportunity has occurred the special number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein there are a plurality of types of the special numbers.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation in which the probability of obtaining a special lottery result varies from the probability in the predetermined situation. In this case, for example, if the probability of obtaining a special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of times that the situation in which the probability fluctuates will continue for a long time will be selected. If the probability of obtaining a lottery result is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of continuations in which the situation in which the probability fluctuates does not continue will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of features F1 to F3, any one of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1, or Multiple configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (function for executing the winning/failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Selection means for selecting the probability of obtaining a special lottery result in the special lottery process from among three or more types of probability A function to execute processing, and a function to execute the first game state transition processing and the second game state transition processing in the main side MPU 92 in the sixth and seventh embodiments). game machine.

According to the feature G1, since there are three or more types of probabilities of special lottery results, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the probabilities, and to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of feature G1, any one or more of features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, and feature G1 configuration may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, and the feature group G, the following problems can be solved. is.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... 1st operation|movement part, 33... 2nd operation part, 35... Through winning part for distribution, 36... Distribution winning device, 37... Special electric winning device, 42a... Special figure display part, 42c... Distribution display unit 44 Symbol display device 69 V winning detection sensor 86 Payout device 87 Payout control device 92 Main side MPU 103 Sound and light side MPU 113 Display side MPU.

Claims (1)

privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity due to a game operation of the player during a specific period;
a predetermined operation control means for controlling the predetermined operation means so that a predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined action control means comprises mode determination means for changing the execution mode of the predetermined unit action depending on whether or not the privilege giving opportunity has occurred in the specific period.

Images